Jeep 2007 Grand Cherokee Owners Manual

Jeep-2007-Grand-Cherokee-Owners-Manual-762674 jeep-2007-grand-cherokee-owners-manual-762674

2007 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2007_WK_Jeep_Grand_Cherokee Troubleshoot 2007 Jeep Grand Cherokee |

2015-10-23

: Jeep Jeep-2007-Jeep-Grand-Cherokee-Owners-Manual-817339 jeep-2007-jeep-grand-cherokee-owners-manual-817339 jeep pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 472

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

▫ Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

䡵 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

䡵 Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . 9

INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION
Thank you for selecting a Jeep威 Grand Cherokee and
welcome to our worldwide family.
This is a specialized utility vehicle designed for both on-road
and off-road use. It can go places and perform tasks for
which conventional two-wheel drive vehicles were not
intended. However, on-road ride and handling will have a
different feel from what drivers experience with other
vehicles, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle.
The two-wheel drive utility vehicle was designed for
on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving
or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel
drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read this manual. Be
sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering and transmission
and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills

will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
working the vehicle, don’t overload it or expect it to
overcome the laws of nature. Always observe federal,
state, provincial, and local laws wherever you drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an
accident. Be sure to read “On-Road/Off-Road Driving
Tips” in Section 5 of this manual.
Roll Over Warning
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll over rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance, higher center of gravity, and narrower
track than many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications.
Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can be caused to
go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity
and the narrower track, if this vehicle is out of control it
may roll over when some other vehicles may not.

INTRODUCTION

Do not attempt sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in an accident, roll over of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.

Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
each year, and could reduce disabling injuries by 2
million annually. In a roll over crash an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. Always buckle up.
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

Roll Over Warning Label

INTRODUCTION

NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested
in your satisfaction.

WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain
fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:

INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on a
label located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of
your vehicle identification number and optional equipment.

NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN label.

INTRODUCTION

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS

1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2

CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

䡵 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

䡵 Sentry Key Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

䡵 Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ Important Note About Service . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

▫ To Release The Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . .21

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

䡵 Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .18

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . .36

䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . .24

▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . .40

䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

▫ Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped . . . . .40

▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .26

▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .42

䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
䡵 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .64
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic
bag with the key code number on it. If you received your
keys without the bag, ask your authorized dealer to give
you the number. The key code can also be obtained by
your authorized dealer from your vehicle invoice.

Ignition Key Removal
Place the shift lever in P (Park). Turn the ignition switch
to the OFF position, and remove the key.

Ignition Key Positions

Ignition Key

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could
be injured. Children should be warned not to touch
the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector
lever. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.

CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If the driver’s door is opened when the key is in the
ignition and not turned to the ON position, a chime will
sound to remind you to remove the key.
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIM) prevents
unauthorized operation of the vehicle by disabling the
engine. The system will shut the engine down after 2
seconds of running if an invalid key is used to start the
vehicle. This system utilizes ignition keys which have an
electronic chip (transponder) embedded into them. Only
keys that have been programmed to the vehicle can be
used to start and operate the vehicle for longer than the
2 second validation time period.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be
armed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic
regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or
unlocked. During normal operation, the SKIM indicator

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

light will come on for 3 seconds immediately after the
ignition switch is turned on for a bulb check. Afterwards,
if the bulb remains on, this indicates a malfunction in the
electronics. If the bulb begins to flash immediately after
the ignition switch is turned on, this indicates that an
invalid key is being used to start the vehicle. Both of
these conditions will result in the engine being shut
down after 2 seconds of running. Keep in mind that a key
which has not been programmed is also considered an
invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition for that
vehicle.
If the SKIM indicator light comes on during normal
vehicle operation (it has been running for longer than 10
seconds) a fault has been detected in the electronics and
the vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible.
NOTE:
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible

with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
• Mobil Speedpass™, additional Sentry Keys, or any
other transponder equipped components on the same
keychain will not cause a key-related (Transponder)
fault unless the additional part is physically held
against the ignition key being used when starting the
vehicle. Also, cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Important Note About Service
A four digit PIN number is needed to service the Sentry
Key Immobilizer System. This number can be obtained
from your authorized dealer. However, this number can
also be found on your customer invoice that you were
given upon receipt of your vehicle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Replacement Keys

Customer Key Programming

NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.

You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid keys by doing the following:

At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four digit PIN number. This number is required
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key is one which has never been
programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys to the dealer.

1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds, a chime
will sound and the SKIM indicator light will begin to
flash. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the
second key.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds, a single chime will sound. The SKIM indicator
light will stop flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turn
off.
The new Sentry Key has been programmed. Repeat this
process to program up to a total of 8 keys.
General Information
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System complies with FCC
rules part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system monitors the vehicle doors, liftgate, liftgate
flipper glass, and ignition for unauthorized operation
and movement inside of the vehicle. When the alarm is
activated, the system provides both audible and visual
signals. The horn will sound repeatedly for three minutes
and the headlights and taillights will flash for an additional 15 minutes.
To Set the Alarm
The alarm will set when you use the remote keyless entry
transmitter to lock the doors and liftgate or when you use
the power door lock switch while the door is open. After
all the doors are locked and closed, a red light (located in
the instrument cluster) will flash rapidly for about 16
seconds to signal that the system is arming. During this
16 second pre-arm period, opening any door or the
liftgate will cancel the arming. If the system successfully
arms, the red light will flash at a slower rate to indicate
the alarm is set. A manual lock of the doors, either with

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

the door lock plunger located on the inside of the doors
or with the driver’s door key lock cylinder, will not set
the alarm.

the system. The Security Alarm System will not disarm
with a manual unlock, either through the lock plunger
located on the inside of the door, or through a key in the
driver’s door key cylinder.

To Disarm the System
To disarm the system, use the remote keyless entry
transmitter. Also, using a valid sentry key and moving
the ignition switch to the ON/START position will
disarm the system. If something has triggered the system
in your absence, the horn will sound three times when
you unlock the doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The interior lights come on when you open any door.
They will remain on for about 30 seconds after all doors
are closed then fade to off.

The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the
vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter, once the
system is armed (after 16 seconds), when you move
inside of the vehicle or you pull the door handle to exit
the alarm will sound. If this occurs, press the “Unlock”
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter to disarm

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
liftgate, or activate the panic alarm from distances up to
about 23 feet (7 meters) using a hand held transmitter.
The transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle
to activate the system.

The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition
after you close all the doors.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If the key is in the ignition switch, then all
buttons on that transmitter will be disabled. The buttons
on the remaining transmitters will work. If the vehicle is
shifted out of P (Park), all the transmitter buttons are
disabled for all keys.

Five Button Transmitter

Four Button Transmitter

To Unlock the Doors
Press and release the “Unlock” button on the transmitter
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock all
doors. The turn signal lights will flash twice to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system also
turns on.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If desired, the system can be programmed to
unlock all doors on the first press of the “Unlock” button.
Refer to “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st” in the
Personal Settings section of the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”, or simply follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the “Lock” button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the “Lock” button is pressed, (after 4 seconds)
press the “Unlock” button. Release both buttons.
The “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st” feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure.
To Lock the Doors
Press and release the “Lock” button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash once to
acknowledge the lock signal. The horn will chirp once to
acknowledge the signal. If desired, the “Sound Horn On
Lock” feature can be turned on and off by referring to the

Customer Programmable Features of the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” section or by following
these steps.
1. Press and hold the “Lock” button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the “Lock” button is pressed (after 4 seconds),
press the PANIC button. Release both buttons.
The “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be reactivated by
repeating this procedure.
To Release the Liftgate Flipper Glass
Press the “Flipper Glass/Trunk Release” button on the
transmitter two times to release the flipper glass.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the flipper glass closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you
turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or
if the vehicle speed is 15 mph (24 km/h) or greater.

NOTE: The interior lights will turn off when the ignition
is switched to the ACC or ON position after the panic
alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn
will remain on.
NOTE: When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
To Turn Off “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock”
NOTE: If desired, the “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock”
feature can be turned on and off by referring to the
Customer Programmable Features of the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” section or by following
these steps.
1. Press and hold the “Unlock” button for 4 to 10
seconds.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. While the “Unlock” button is pressed, (after 4 seconds)
press the “Lock” button. Release both buttons.

If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate
from a normal distance, check for these two conditions.

The “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure.

1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.

General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:

2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Transmitter Battery Service
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. With the transmitter buttons facing down, remove the
small screw, and separate the two halves of the transmitter. Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket during
removal.

3. To reassemble the transmitter case, join the two halves
of the case together. Install and tighten the screw until
snug. Make sure there is an even “gap” between the two
halves. Test transmitter operation.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote starting
system, which will allow the vehicle to be started up to
300 feet (91 meters) away from the vehicle using the
remote keyless entry key fob which is part of your
ignition key.
In order to remote start your vehicle, the hood, liftgate,
and all of the doors must be closed.

Separating Transmitter Halves

2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.

To remote start your vehicle, press the “Lock” button on
the key fob once, then within three seconds press the
“Remote Start” button twice. To indicate that the vehicle
is about to start, the parking lights will flash and the horn
will sound briefly.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

unlocked, you have 60 seconds to enter the vehicle, insert
the key into the ignition, and move it to the RUN
position. Otherwise, the engine will cancel remote start
and automatically turn off.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:

Remote Start Button

Once the vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15
minutes. To cancel remote start, press the “Remote Start”
button twice within two seconds.
To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a
remote start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the
“Unlock” button on the key fob. After the vehicle is

• If the engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
• Any engine warning lamps come on
• The hood is opened
• The hazard switch is pressed
• The transmission is moved out of P (Park).
The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of
two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one
failed start, where the remote start sequence was initiated
but cancelled before the engine begins to crank. After
either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle Theft Alarm is
alarming, or if the PANIC button was pressed, the vehicle
must be reset by inserting a valid key into the ignition
and moving it to the RUN position, then back to LOCK.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the
keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door.

Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A door lock switch is on each front door panel. Press this
switch to lock or unlock the doors.

WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.

Power Door Lock Switch

If the plunger is down when the door is closed, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the keys are not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If you press the door lock switch while the keys are in the
ignition switch, and the driver’s door is open, the doors
will not lock.
The rear doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle
until you pull up the lock plungers.
Automatic Door Locks
If this feature is selected your door locks will lock
automatically if the vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24
km/h) and all doors are closed. It will reset whenever a
door is opened.
This feature is selectable and can be turned on or off.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
Customer Programmable Features” in Section 4 of this
manual or see your authorized dealer.

Automatic Unlock on Exit Feature — Only
Available if Auto Lock is Enabled
This feature will unlock all the doors when the driver’s
door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in P (Park) or
N (Neutral). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — Customer Programmable Features” in
Section 4 of this manual or see your authorized dealer.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Child Protection Door Lock
The rear doors of your vehicle are equipped with child
protection locks. If you push up on the lever on the open
edge of the door it cannot be opened from the inside of
the vehicle. Push the lever down to disengage the child
protection locks.

WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.

Child Protection Door Lock

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door/rear doors which operates the front
passenger/rear passenger door windows. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON or ACCESSORY position.

Power Window Switches

The power window switches remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Auto Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switch has
an “Auto Down” feature. Press the window switch past
the first detent, release, and the window will go down
automatically. To cancel the “Auto Down” movement,
operate the switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
To open the window part way, press to the first detent
and release it when you want the window to stop.
The power window switches remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.

Auto Up Feature with Anti-Pinch Protection
(Driver’s and Front Passenger Door Only)
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during the
auto-closure it will reverse direction and then stop.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
close the window. Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
during auto closure. If this happens pull the switch
lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window
manually.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.

Resetting the Auto-Up Feature
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
Pull the window switch up and close the window completely, then pull and hold the switch for 1 second.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window lockout button. To enable the window controls,
press the window lockout button again.

Power Window Lock

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To open the liftgate, pull up (squeeze) on the handle and
lift. Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the
plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the
liftgate.

Liftgate Release

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.

Liftgate Flipper Glass
The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the
liftgate is unlocked. To open the flipper glass, push up on
the window switch located on the liftgate.
Liftgate Glass Release

WARNING!
To avoid injury stand back when opening. Glass will
automatically rise.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Once the liftgate flipper glass has been opened, connection to the rear window wiper is interrupted, preventing
activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass
is open.
NOTE: If a power malfunction to the power liftgate
latch should occur, an emergency liftgate latch release
can be used to open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate
latch release can be accessed through a snap-in cover
located on the liftgate trim panel.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and right front passenger, and
window bags for the driver and passengers seated next to
a window. If you will be carrying children too small for
adult-size belts, your seat belts also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems.

WARNING!

NOTE: The front airbags have a multi stage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on collision severity.

Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the flipper glass closed when you are operating the
vehicle.

Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
injuries, including fatalities, if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out
of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision which includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times to reduce or prevent injuries.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle have combination
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for
more than one person, no matter what their size.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Latch Plate

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

Latch Plate To Buckle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a
sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing
the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs
aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from
injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your
head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up a
bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.

WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your authorized dealer and have it fixed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.

6. To release the belt, push the red button marked PRESS
on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow it to retract fully.

WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Removing Slack From Belt

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
that serves you best.

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Anytime a child safety seat is installed in the rear center
seating position. Children 12 years old and under should
be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible.
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy
management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.

WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or any other seat belt function is
not working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped
with a pretensioning device that is designed to remove
any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a
collision. This device improves the performance of the
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt must still be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Control (ORC) Module. Like the front airbags, the
pretensioners are a single use item. After a collision that
is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners,
they must be replaced.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.

Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.

WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint Systems (SRS)

This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
steering wheel. The passenger side airbag is mounted in
the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS/AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.

Front Airbag Components

This vehicle is equipped with window bags to protect the
driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a window. They are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS/AIRBAG.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured because
the airbags are no longer functional. These protective
covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only
when the airbags are inflating.

• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to
block the location of the window bag. The area where
the window bag is located should remain free from any
obstructions.

• Do not have any accessory items installed which will
Window Airbag Location

NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.

alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent
attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for
any reason.

• Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers. These
items may cause serious injury during inflation.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the window bags.
The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design. This
allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that
are based on collision severity. Along with the seat belts,
front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and
front passenger. Window bags also work with seat belts
to improve occupant protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
The window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is

triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. In certain
types of collisions, both the front and side airbags may be
triggered. But even in collisions where the airbags work,
you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position
for the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag. An
airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat, in a
child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat. Older
children who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. See “Child Restraint” in this section.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

2. All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts
properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to
inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window, airbags will
inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under “If
You Need Assistance” in Section 9 of this manual.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Side curtain airbags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.

Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
• Occupant Restraint Control Module
• Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Airbag
• Passenger Airbag
• Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows
• Side Remote Acceleration Sensors
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Interconnecting Wiring
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Front Acceleration Sensors

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
How The Airbag System Works
• The Occupant Restraint Control (ORC) Module determines if a frontal, side, or rollover collision is severe
enough to require the front and/or side airbags to
inflate. The front airbag inflators are designed to
provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC will detect roll
overs, not rear impacts.
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the knee bolster, the instrument panel, and the steering wheel and column. If the
key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or
not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and will not
inflate.

Also, the ORC turns on the “Airbag Warning
Light” for 6 to 8 seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the “Airbag Warning Light” will
turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the “Airbag Warning Light”
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound if the light comes on again after initial start
up.

WARNING!
Ignoring the “Airbag Warning Light” in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not
come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have the airbag system
checked right away.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
are possible, based on collision severity and occupant
size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
right side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size. The
bags fully inflate in about 50–70 milliseconds. This is
about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the
driver and front passenger.
The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent
holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger front
airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides
of the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere
with your control of the vehicle.

• The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side or rollover
collisions. When the ORC (with side impact option)
detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to
inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the
vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the side curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner
out of the way and covers the window. The airbag
inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one quarter of
the time it takes to blink your eyes) with enough force
to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the side
curtain airbag inflates. This especially applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about 31⁄2 inches
(9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the
Occupant Restraint Control (ORC) Module detects a
moderate-to-severe frontal collision, to help restrain the
driver and front passenger, and then to immediately
deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.

They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Maintaining Your Airbag System

Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and seat belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.

• Modifications to any part of the airbag system could

Enhanced Accident Response Feature
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,
approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped
moving, the interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility.

• You need proper knee impact protection in a colli-

NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if the
key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is
driven.

WARNING!
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the airbag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring,
including adding any kind of badges or stickers to
the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper or vehicle body structure.
sion. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an airbag system.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate
for your protection in an impact. The airbag system is
designed to be maintenance free. If any of the following
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system
promptly:
• Does not come on during the 6 to 8 seconds after the
ignition switch is first turned on.
• Remains on after the 6 to 8 second interval.
• Comes on for any period of time while driving.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an airbag deployment, your vehicle is
designed to record up to 2-seconds of specific vehicle
data parameters (see the following list) in the event data
recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment.
Please note that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag
deploys, and are otherwise unavailable. In conjunction

with other data gathered during a complete accident
investigation, the electronic data may be used by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation, such investigations may
be requested by customers, insurance carriers, government officials, and professional crash researchers, such as
those associated with universities, and with hospital and
insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative),
the company or its designated representative will first
obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for
the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the US government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corporation to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of litigation
DaimlerChrysler Corporation product

involving

Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
• Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
• ⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
• Seat belt status
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
• Engine control status (including engine speed)

3. Requested by police under a legal warrant

• Cruise control status

4. Otherwise required by law

• Traction/stability control status

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time — babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child:

WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Infants and Child Restraints
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and “convertible” child seats.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rearward-facing by children who weigh more than 20
lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage
system (Refer to LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage
System in this section.)
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.

WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing infant
restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Standards. The manufacturer also recommends that
you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you
will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Except for the second row center seating position, all
passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch
plates. The second row center position has an automatic locking retractor identified by a distinctive label.
Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap
portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. If the seat belt has a
cinching latch plate, pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt (the

cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight, however,
any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary). For the
second row center seat belt with the automatic locking
retractor, pull the belt from the retractor until there is
enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint
and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then, pull the
belt until it is fully extracted from the retractor. Allow
the belt to return to the retractor, pulling on the excess
webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child
restraint. For additional information, refer to ⬙Automatic Locking Mode⬙ earlier in this section.
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• If the belt still cannot be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still cannot make the child restraint
secure, try a different seating position.
• Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
NOTE:
For additional information refer
www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-SEATCHECK.

Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction, are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and who are
older than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child
Seat Anchorage System in this section.)
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seat back, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltpositioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.

LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CH ildren)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.

All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats having flexible, webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child seats with fixed lower attachments
must be installed in the outboard positions only. Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment, NEVER
install LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats
share a common lower anchorage.
If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints
in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the
LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard
position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the
center position. If your child restraints are not LATCHcompatible, you can only install the child restraints using
the vehicle’s seat belts. Please refer to the next section for
typical installation instructions.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back,
and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and
seat cushion surfaces.

Latch Anchorages

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the seat.

Tether Strap Mounting

Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a

means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover material.
Then, locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat
where you are placing the child restraint and attach the
tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to route the
tether strap to provide the most direct path between the
anchor and the child restraint. Finally, tighten all three
straps as you push the child restraint rearward and
downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. If
the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on the
shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the
belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight,
however, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.

If the seat belt has a automatic locking retractor, it will
have a distinctive label. Pull the belt from the retractor
until there is enough to allow you to pass through the
child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle.
Then, pull the belt until it is all extracted from the
retractor. Allow the belt to return to the retractor, pulling
on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about
the child restraint. Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode”
earlier in this section.
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.

To attach a child restraint tether strap:
Route the tether strap over the seat back and attach the
hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
For the outboard seating positions, route the tether over
the head rests, and attach the hook to the tether anchor
located on the back of the seat.

Tether Strap Mounting

WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the child.
Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas

WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing (CO) follow the safety
tips below.

• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for a extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
• Always run the climate control in panel or floor mode
when driving with any windows open, even if only
slightly, to help keep fresh air circulating inside vehicle. Otherwise poisonous gases could be drawn into
the vehicle.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor
condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned on. If the bulb is not lit during starting, have it
replaced. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defrosters
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should feel the air
directed against the windshield.

Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of all exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes
are detected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . .72
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

3
▫ Power Remote Control Mirrors —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ Heated Remote Control Mirrors —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Lighted Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . .76
䡵 Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking Remote
Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . 107

▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

▫ To Disable A Transmitter Linked To Memory . . 109

▫ Front Manual Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

▫ Front Seat Adjustment — Recline . . . . . . . . . . 100

䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

▫ Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment . . . . . . . 101

䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

▫ 8 - Way Driver’s Power Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

▫ Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

▫ 4 - Way Passenger’s Power Seat —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

▫ Battery Saver Feature—Exterior/Interior
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 114

▫ Heated Seats—If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

▫ Automatic Headlight System — If Equipped . . 114

▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

▫ Smartbeams — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 106

▫ Instrument Panel And Interior Lights . . . . . . . 116

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . . 116

䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

䡵 Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 124

▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

▫ High Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

▫ To Set At a Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

▫ Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

▫ Driving Up Or Down Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

▫ Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System . . . 121

▫ ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

▫ Rain Sensing Wipers—If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 122

▫ TCS (Traction Control System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

▫ Turning The Rear Camera Off . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

▫ ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation) . . . . . . . . . . 132

䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

▫ ESP (Electronic Stability Program) . . . . . . . . . 133

▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

▫ ESP/BAS Warning Lamp And ESP/TCS
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

䡵 Rear Park Assist System— If Equipped . . . . . . . 138
▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Rear Park Assist Warning Display . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Enable/Disable The Rear Park Assist System . . 140
▫ Service The Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . 142
䡵 Rear Camera — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Turning The Rear Camera On . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Programming HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . . 151
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Erasing HomeLink Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button . . . 152
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ Opening Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Closing Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

▫ Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

▫ Rear Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

▫ Venting Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
䡵 Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
䡵 Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped . . 164
▫ Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped . . . . . . 165
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 166

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.

A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror.
Annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you can
be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror
to the night position (toward rear of vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror.
A light next to the button will indicate when the dimming
feature is activated.

Adjusting Rear View Mirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side
mirror.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature
All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions; full forward, full rearward, and
normal.

Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped
Turn the power mirror switch knob all the way down to
the left or right to fold in the mirrors. Turn the knob back
upward to the left mirror, right mirror, or off (center)
position to the normal (unfolded) driving position.

Power Folding Mirror Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Both mirrors will always move together and will fold
anytime the knob is turned. The ignition switch does not
have to be in the ON position.
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with a driver’s outside automatic dimming mirror, it operates when the inside automatic dimming mirror is on. This outside mirror operates
off the inside mirror switch and will automatically adjust
for annoying headlight glare when the inside mirror does.

After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.

NOTE: The passenger outside mirror does not have this
dimming feature.
Power Remote Control Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotary
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror, or off position.

Power Mirror Switches

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in this section for details. (See page 106 for
more information.)
Heated Remote Control Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defrost.
Lighted Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
To access a lighted vanity mirror, flip down one of the
visors.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
automatically.

Lighted Vanity Mirror

Sun Visor Extension (If Equipped)
This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for
increased coverage.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial”
ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation.

The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Bluetooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system.

The UConnect™ system can be used with any HandsFree Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,
Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UConnect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
system can be adjusted either from the radio volume
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.

UConnect™ Switches

The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Operations
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the voice on beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt
or another prompt.

example, you can use the combined form voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
sitting eight feet away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.

• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙

Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options are at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will play
all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.

• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For

To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
⬙Cancel⬙ and you will be returned to the main menu.
However, in a few instances the system will take you
back to the previous menu.

NOTE:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect

Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.

The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:

NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:

• www.dodge.com/uconnect
• www.jeep.com/uconnect

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing⬙ and follow the audible prompts.
• When prompted, after the voice on beep, say ⬙Pair a
Phone⬙ and follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number,
which you will later need to enter into your cellular.
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not
need to remember this pin number after the initial
pairing process.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone
Connectivity⬙).

Call/Dial by Saying a Number
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
• System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call/Dial by Saying a Name
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial” or Call.⬙

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.

• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙

• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phonebook. Refer to ⬙Add Names to Your UConnect™
Phonebook,⬙ to learn how to store a name in the
phonebook.

• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and is recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙

• The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.

• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.

• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ feature.
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition⬙ button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
• After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home,
work, mobile, or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.

After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted. Note that only the phonebook in the current
language is deleted.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the ⬙Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name, and then say ⬙Call.⬙ NOTE: the user can also
exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ operations at this point.
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.

Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
call was rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The
UConnect™ system compatible phones in market today
do not support rejecting an incoming call when another
call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either
answer an incoming call or ignore it.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to ⬙Toggling Between Calls.⬙ To combine two calls, refer
to ⬙Conference Call.⬙
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the ⬘Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
⬘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep

indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recognition’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under ⬙Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call has
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ⬘Phone’
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
Redial
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ system.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:

• After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
• After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
UConnect™ System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).

If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:

• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change operation, only the language specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.

• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is only supported in the USA.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell
phone directly.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
city in Mexico).
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.

Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voicemail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’
button and say ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send⬙ is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.

Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™
system will not repeat a phone number before you dial
it).

Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧ,⬙ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.

Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.

Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:

NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.

In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:

• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute.⬙
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute-off.⬙

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Information Service
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number ⬙#121,⬙ you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information.

If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow the
instruction described in your cellular phone user’s
manual.

Advanced Phone Connectivity

List Paired Cellular Phone Names

Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone pairing”.
• When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the ⬘Voice recognition’
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a paired phone.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.

Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.

• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UConnect™ system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately with in 30
feet) the vehicle.

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙

• You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played and then choose
the phone you wish to delete.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
Voice Recognition (VR)
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,

• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system, such
as voice mail, or when sending a page at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙send.⬙
• Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
• UConnect™ phonebook nametag recognition rate is
optimized for the voice of the person who stored the
name in the phonebook.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows, and
• dry weather condition.
• Operation from driver seat.

• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect™ system.
• Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Occasionally, Cellular phones have been found to lose
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ⬙on⬙ mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least
five (5) seconds prior to using the system.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

North American English
Primary
Alternate(s)
Zero
Oh
Add location
Add new
All
All of them
Confirmation prompts
Confirmations prompts
Delete a name
Delete
Language
Select language
List names
List all
List paired phones
List phones
Pager
Beeper
Phone pairing
Pairing
Phonebook
Phone book
Return to main menu
Return. Main menu
Select phone
select
Set up
Phone settings phone set
up

SEATS
Front Manual Seat Adjustment
Move the seat forward or rearward using the adjustment
bar. Lift up on the bar located on the front of the seat near
the floor. Position the seat and be sure the latch engages
fully.

WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.

100

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Front Seat Adjustment — Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back, and release the lever
at the desired position. To return the seatback, lift the
lever, lean forward, and release the lever.

WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a
collision you could slide under the seat belt and be
seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.

WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment
The manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located
on the right side of the driver’s seat and on the left side
of the passenger’s seat. Moving the lumbar control lever
fore and aft increases or decreases the lumbar support.

101

8 - Way Driver’s Power Seat
The driver’s power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the driver’s seat lower side trim. The
bottom switch controls up/down, forward/rearward,
and tilt adjustment. The top switch controls the seatback
recline adjustment.

Manual Lumbar Control
Power Seat Switches

102

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

4 - Way Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The front passenger’s power seat switches are located on
the outboard side of the passenger seat lower side trim.
The bottom switch controls forward/rearward adjustment. The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.
NOTE: The 4 - way seat does not have an up/down
adjustment.
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Adjustable head
restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as
high as practical. The head restraints have a locking
button which must be pushed in to lower the head
restraint to all positions. The restraints may be raised
without pushing in the button.

Adjustable Head Restraints

Heated Seats—If Equipped
Heated seats provide comfort and warmth on cold days
and can help soothe sore muscles and backs. The heaters
provide the same heat level for both cushion and back.
The front driver and passenger seats are heated. The
controls for each heater are located near the bottom

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

center of the instrument panel. After turning on the
ignition, you can choose from High, Off, or Low heat
settings. Amber LEDs in the top portion of each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two LEDs are illuminated for high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the
switch once will select high-level heating.

103

Pressing the switch a second time will select low-level
heating. Pressing the switch a third time will shut the
heating elements off.
When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation after heating is activated. The heat output
then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If
high-level heating is selected, the system will automatically switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated
LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change.
Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically
after 30 minutes.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.

Heated Seat Switches

104

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat.

NOTE: Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seatback to
fold down easily.
1. Pull the release strap (toward the front of the vehicle)
to release.

60/40 Split Rear Seat
To Lower Rear Seat
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for
extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating
room.

Rear Seat Release

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Do not fold the rear seat down with the center
seat belt buckled.
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
NOTE: The automatic folding rear head restraints will
lower as the seat is folded down.

105

To Raise Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position. The automatic folding rear head restraints must be manually returned from the folded
position to the raised seating position.

WARNING!
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in an accident. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.

Folding Rear Seat

106

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Storage — Rear Seat Armrest (If Equipped)
The rear seat may be equipped with a center storage
armrest.

Armrest Storage Bin

Rear Seat Armrest

Press the latch and lift the top of the armrest to access the
storage bin.

DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
Once programmed, the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the
driver’s door panel can be used to recall the driver’s seat,
driver’s outside mirror, adjustable brake and accelerator
pedals, and radio station preset settings. Your Remote

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Keyless Entry transmitters can also be programmed to
recall the same positions when the “Unlock” button is
pressed.

107

can accommodate up to four transmitters, each one
linked to either of the two memory positions.
Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote
Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory
NOTE: Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered
button (1 or 2) are pressed, you erase the memory settings
for that button and store a new one.
1. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.

Driver Memory Switches

Your vehicle may have been delivered with two Remote
Keyless Entry transmitters. One or both transmitters can
be linked to either memory position. The memory system

2. Press the driver door memory button number 1 if you
are setting the memory for driver 1, or button number 2
if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The system
will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system to
complete the memory recall before continuing to step 3.
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s side
view mirror to the desired positions.

108

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired
positions.

10. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.

5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set).

11. Select ⬙Remote Linked to Memory⬙ in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter ⬙Yes⬙ or
select ⬙Use Factory Settings⬙ from the EVIC and enter
⬙Yes⬙. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — Customer Programmable Features” in Section
4 for more information.

6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
7. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the
driver’s door.
8. Within 5 seconds, press and release memory button 1
or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be performed within 5 seconds if you desire to also use a
Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to recall memory positions.
9. Press and release the “Lock” button on one of the
transmitters.

12. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory
position using the other numbered memory button or to
link another Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to
memory.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in Park to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in Park, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
memory button number 1 on the driver’s door or the
“Unlock” button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to memory position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
memory button number 2 on the driver’s door or the
“Unlock” button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory
buttons on the drivers door during a recall (S, 1, or 2).
When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, driver’s
mirror, and the pedals stop moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be selected.

109

To Disable A Transmitter Linked to Memory
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
2. Press and release memory button number 1. The
system will recall any memory settings stored in position
1. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall
before continuing to step 3.
3. Press and release the memory SET (S) button located
on the driver’s door.
4. Within 5 seconds, press and release memory button 1
on the driver’s door.
5. Within 5 seconds, press and release the “Unlock”
button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter.
To disable another transmitter linked to either memory
position, repeat steps 1-5 for each transmitter.

110

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Once programmed, all transmitters linked to
memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
Refer to Remote Linked to Memory under ⬙Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer Programmable Features⬙ in Section 4 for more information.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning
which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the
vehicle.
There are two possible Easy Exit and Easy Entry adjustments available:
• The seat cushion will move rearward approximately
2.5 inches (60 mm) if the starting position of the seat is
greater than or equal to 2.67 inches (68 mm) forward of
the rear seat stop when the key is removed from the
ignition switch. The seat will then move forward

approximately 2.5 inches (60 mm) when the key is
placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK
position.
• The seat shall move to the position located 0.3 inches
(8 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting position
is between 0.9 inches to 2.67 inches (23 mm to 68 mm)
forward of the rear stop when the key is removed from
the ignition switch. The seat will move forward to the
memory/driving position when the key is placed into
the ignition, and turned out of the LOCK position
toward the RUN position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature will be automatically
disabled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0.9
inches (23 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position
there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for
Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is not enabled
when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry Easy Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled)
through the programmable features in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to ⬙Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer Programmable Features⬙ in Section 4 for more information.

111

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, pull the release lever inside your
vehicle located below the instrument panel and in front
of the driver’s door.
Hood Release Lever

112

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Then, reach under the hood, move safety latch to the left,
and lift the hood. To prevent possible damage, do not
slam the hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at
the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.

Underhood Safety Latch

WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before
driving.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

LIGHTS
Multi-Function Control Lever
The multi-function control lever controls the operation of
the headlights, turn signals, headlight beam selection,
instrument panel light dimming, passing light, interior
courtesy/dome lights, and optional fog lights.

Multi-Function Control Lever

113

Battery Saver Feature—Exterior/Interior Lights
If the multi-function control lever is left in the interior
light position, parking light position, or the headlight
position when the ignition switch is moved to the OFF
position, the battery saver feature will automatically turn
off the exterior and interior lights after eight minutes.
Normal operation will resume when the ignition is
turned ON or when the headlight switch is turned to
another position.

114

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Headlights and Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multi-function control lever to the
first detent for parking light operation. Turn to the
second detent for headlight operation. Turn to the third
detent for “Auto” headlight operation (if equipped).

Automatic Headlight System — If Equipped
Turn the end of the multi-function control lever to the
third detent to activate the automatic headlight system.
This system performs two functions. With the engine
running and the multi-function control lever in the A
(Auto) position, the headlights will turn on and off based
on the surrounding light levels.
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights it
also has this customer programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode, and the engine is
running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper
system is on.

Headlight Switch

If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper
System,” and it is activated, the headlights will automatically turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles
within approximately 1 minute, and they will turn off
approximately four minutes after the wipers completely

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers and Washers” in this
section for more information. (See page 120 for more
information.)
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the
daytime, the instrument panel lights will automatically
dim to the lower nighttime intensity. Refer to “Instrument Panel and Interior Lights” below for setting the
instrument panel lights to full daytime intensity.
SmartBeams — If Equipped
The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside
rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light
and automatically switches from high beams to low
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.

115

NOTE: If the windshield or SmartBeam mirror is replaced, the SmartBeam mirror must be re-aimed to
ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
To Activate
1. Select “Auto Headlamp Low/High Beams? — Low/
High Beam.” Refer to “EVIC — Customer Programmable
Features” in Section 4 of this manual.
2. Turn the end of the multi-function control lever to the
A (Auto) headlight position.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).

116

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Deactivate
1. Pull back on the muti-function control lever to manually deactivate the system (normal operation of high
beams).
2. Pull back on the multi-function control lever once
again to re-activate the system.
NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions (sticker, toll box,
etc.) on the windshield or camera lens will cause the
system to function improperly.
Instrument Panel and Interior Lights
When the multi-function control lever is in the parklight,
headlight, or A (Auto) position (if equipped), rotating the
center portion of the lever up and down will increase and
decrease the brightness (dimmer control) of the instrument

panel lights. Full daytime brightness on all electronic
displays (odometer, overhead console, radio, and Automatic Climate Control (if equipped) is obtained by rotating
the center portion of the control to the first detent above
the dimmer range. Rotating the control to the second
detent above the dimmer range turns the interior lights on.
Rotating the control to the “Off” (extreme bottom) position
disables all the interior lights, even when the doors and
liftgate are open. While in the “Off” position the instrument panel lighting is at the lowest light level and may not
be suitable for night driving.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The high beam headlights come on at a low intensity
level whenever the engine is running, and the transmission in not in the P (Park) position. The lights remain on
until the ignition switch is turned OFF or the parking
brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be used for
normal night time driving.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound when the driver’s door
is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located in the multifunction control lever. To activate the fog lights,
turn on the park/turn lights, low beam headlights,
or “Auto” headlights and pull out the end of the multifunction control lever. A light in the instrument cluster
shows when the fog lights are on.
NOTE: Turning on the high beam headlights turns off
the fog lights.
A front fog light is a lighting device providing illumination forward of the vehicle under conditions of fog, rain,
snow, or dust. Principally, the front fog light supplements
the lower beam of a standard headlight system.

117

NOTE: Proper aim and adjustments of the front fog
lights should be made to prevent excessive glare for other
drivers.
Turn Signals
Move the multi-function control lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster will
flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn
signal lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the
lever partially up or down.
Turn Signal Auto-Mode
Tap the multi-function control lever once and the turn
signal (left or right) will flash 3 times, and automatically
turn off.

118

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

High Beam Switch
Pull the multi-function control lever towards you to
switch the headlights to “High” beam. The “High Beam
Indicator Light” on the instrument cluster will illuminate. Pull the multi-function control lever a second time
to switch the headlights to “Low” beam.
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multi-function control lever toward
the steering wheel. This will cause the headlights to turn
on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released.
Headlight Time Delay
There is also a feature that delays turning off the vehicle
lights for 30, 60, or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned OFF. To activate the headlight delay, the multifunction control lever must be rotated to the “Off”

position after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Only the
headlights will illuminate during this time. Refer to
“EVIC- Customer Programmable Features” in Section 4
to turn this feature “On/Off” or set the time interval.
Interior Lights
The interior lighting consists of courtesy lights mounted
below the instrument panel, an overhead console light
assembly which contains both driver and passenger
reading lights, reading lights located above the rear
doors, and a rear cargo light. Opening a door or turning
the center of the multi-function control lever to the
extreme up position will activate all interior courtesy
lights.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

119

Front Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each
light can be turned on by pressing the recessed area of the
lens. To turn these lights off, press the recessed area of the
lens a second time. There are also reading lights located
above the rear doors. Each light can be turned on by
pressing the front recessed area of the lens. To turn these
lights off, press the recessed area of the lens a second
time.

Front Map/Reading Lights

120

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The front and rear wipers and washers are operated by a
switch in the right side control lever. Turn the end of the
control lever to select “Lo,” “Hi,” or one of the five speed
sensitive intermittent windshield wiper speeds. Refer to
“Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System” in this
section. For information on the rear wiper and washer,
refer to “Rear Window Features” in this section. (See
page 164 for more information.)

Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch

NOTE: Always remove any build-up of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to
the OFF position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the OFF
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds
after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers
will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.

WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.

121

Mist
Use this feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Pull down and
release the control lever for a single wiping cycle.
Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the five intermittent wiper speeds when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable pause between cycles, desirable. Turn the end of
the lever to one of the five delay positions for the desired
delay interval. The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles, to a
cycle every 1/2 second.
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.

122

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Rain Sensing Wipers—If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multi-function lever to one of five settings
to activate this feature.

Rain Sensitive Wiper Switch

The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multi-function lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Settings 4 and 5 can be used if the

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in
the OFF position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The rain sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the LOW or HIGH speed position.
• The rain sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
• A customer programmable feature in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain
Sense feature to be turned off. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer Programmable Features” in Section 4 of this manual.

123

The rain sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the rain sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Transmission in N (Neutral) Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the N
(Neutral) position, the rain sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is
moved out of the N (Neutral) position.

124

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

TILT STEERING COLUMN
To tilt the column, push down on the lever below the turn
signal control and move the wheel up or down, as
desired. Pull the lever back towards you and firmly push
the lever until it is above the lower surface of the shroud
to lock the column in place.

WARNING!
Tilting the steering wheel column while the vehicle
is moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering
column, you could lose control of the vehicle and
have an accident. Adjust the tilting mechanism only
while the vehicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked
before driving.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals
to move toward the driver to provide improved position
with the steering wheel. The adjustable pedal system is
designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for
steering wheel tilt and seat position. The position of the
brake and accelerator pedals can be adjusted without
compromising safety or comfort in actuating the pedals.

Tilt Steering Column

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

125

• The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R
(Reverse) or when the Speed Control is ON. A message
will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”). Refer
to Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
Section 4 for more information.
Adjustable Pedal Switch

Press the left side of the button to move the pedals
rearward (toward the driver).
Press the right side of the button to move the pedals
forward (away from the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.

126

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedal’s
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become
limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in
the adjustable pedal’s path.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, this device takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h) for
3.7L/4.7L engines, 25 mph (40 km/h) for 5.7L engines,
and 14 mph (23 km/h) for 3.0L diesel engines. The
controls are mounted on the steering wheel and consist of
ON·OFF, SET, RES·ACCEL, CANCEL, and DECEL controls.

To Activate
Press the ON·OFF button to turn the system ON. To turn
the system OFF, press the ON·OFF button again. The
system should be turned OFF when not in use. The
CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the system is ON.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Set at a Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
and release the SET button. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, or pressing
the CANCEL button will deactivate the Speed Control
without erasing the memory. Pressing the ON·OFF to
turn the system OFF or turning off the ignition erases the
memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, press and release the
RES·ACCEL button. Resume can be used at any speed
above 30 mph (48 km/h) for 3.7L/4.7L engines, 25 mph
(40 km/h) for 5.7L engines, and 14 mph (23 km/h) for
3.0L diesel engines..

127

To Vary the Speed Setting
When the Speed Control is ON, speed can be increased
by pressing and holding the RES·ACCEL button. When
the button is released, a new set speed will be established.
Tapping the RES·ACCEL button once will result in a 2
mph (3 km/h) (3.7L/4.7L models) or a 1 mph (2 km/h)
(5.7L models) speed increase. Each time the button is
tapped, speed increases, so tapping the button three
times will increase speed by 6 mph (10 km/h) (3.7L/4.7L
models) or 3 mph (5 km/h) (5.7L models), etc.
To decrease speed while Speed Control is ON and SET,
press and hold the DECEL button. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new speed
will be set.

128

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Accelerate for Passing
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000
feet (610 meters), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded
(especially when towing) the vehicle may slow below the
SET speed. If the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph (48
km/h) for 3.7L/4.7L engines, 25 mph (40 km/h) for 5.7L
engines, and 14 mph (23 km/h) for 3.0L diesel engines,
the Speed Control will automatically disengage. If this
happens, you can push down on the accelerator pedal to
maintain the desired speed.
Vehicles may exhibit several 4-3 downshifts under the
above conditions. To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to improve vehicle performance, it is advisable
to lock out overdrive. Press the TOW/HAUL switch on
the lower center switch bank (below the Heating/Air
Conditioning controls).

WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control ON when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the
system OFF when you aren’t using it.
Driving Up or Down Hills
When going up or down hills, it is possible for your
vehicle to lose or gain speed, even though the Speed
Control is engaged. The automatic transmission may also
downshift to a lower gear, to maintain speed going up or
down hills. If going down a hill steep enough to cause the
vehicle to gain speed, press the brake pedal, which will
disengage the Speed Control and help slow your vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
To help keep your vehicle under control, do not use
Speed Control under these conditions:
• When it is not possible to keep your vehicle at a set
speed.
• On slippery roads, such as on snow or ice.
• In heavy or varying traffic volume, in traffic that varies
in speed, or on winding roads.
• Be sure to turn the Speed Control switch to the OFF
position when not in use to avoid accidental engagement.

129

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes ABS (Anti-Lock Brake
System), TCS (Traction Control System), BAS (Brake
Assist System), ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation), and
ESP (Electronic Stability Program). All five systems work
together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions, and are commonly referred to as
ESP.
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in Section 5 of this
manual for more information about ABS.

130

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ABS cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABSequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.

TCS (Traction Control System)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in
either the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes. Refer to “ESP
(Electronic Stability Program)” in this section.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

BAS (Brake Assist System)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.

131

WARNING!
BAS (Brake Assist System) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BASequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.

132

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ERM (Electronic Roll Mitigation)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the
appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only
intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles.

NOTE: Anytime the ESP system is in the “Full Off”
mode, ERM is disabled. Refer to ESP (Electronic Stability
Program) for a complete explanation of the available ESP
modes.

WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.

133

• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ located in the instrument
cluster, starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESP system becomes active. The ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator
Light⬙ also flashes when TCS is active. If the ⬙ESP/TCS
Indicator Light⬙ begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.

134

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
The ESP system has 3 available operating modes in 4WD
High Range, 2 available operating modes on 2WD vehicles, and 1 operating mode in 4WD Low Range.

High Range (4WD Models) or 2WD Models
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD high
range and in 2WD vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is
started or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from
4WD low range or neutral back to 4WD high range, the
ESP system will be in this mode. This mode should be
used for most all driving situations. ESP should only be
turned to “Partial Off” or “Full Off” for specific reasons
as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the
⬙ESP Control Switch⬙. When in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, the
TCS portion of ESP, except for the “limited slip” feature
described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the
⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ will be illuminated. All other
stability features of ESP function normally. This mode is
intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand,

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP
would normally allow is required to gain traction. To
turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the ⬙ESP Control
Switch⬙. This will restore the normal “ESP On” mode of
operation.

ESP Control Switch

135

NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the ESP switch. Once the situation
requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing
the “ESP Control Switch”. This may be done while the
vehicle is in motion.
Full Off (4WD Models Only)
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered by
depressing and holding the “ESP Control Switch” for 5
seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is
running. After 5 seconds, the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light”
will illuminate, and the ⬙ESP OFF⬙ message will appear in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4 of this manual.

136

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

In this mode, ESP and TCS, except for the “limited slip”
feature described in the TCS section, are turned off until
the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At 40
mph (64 km/h) the system returns to “Partial Off” mode,
described above. When the vehicle speed drops below 35
mph (56 km/h) the ESP system shuts off. ESP is off at low
vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off-road
driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability
feature at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h). The “ESP/
TCS Indicator Light” will always be illuminated when
ESP is off. To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the
“ESP Control Switch”. This will restore the normal “ESP
On” mode of operation.
NOTE: The “ESP OFF” message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the gear selector is
placed into the “P” (Park) position from any position
other than “P” (Park), and then moved out of the “P”
(Park) position. This will occur even if the message was
previously cleared.

WARNING!
With the ESP switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable. In
an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESP and ERM
systems will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. The “Full Off” ESP mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
4WD Low Range
Full Off
This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD low
range. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD low range,
or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4WD
high range or neutral to 4WD low range, the ESP system
will be in this mode. In 4WD low range, ESP and TCS,
except for the “limited slip” feature described in the TCS
section, are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

40 mph (64 km/h). At 40 mph (64 km/h), the normal ESP
stability function returns but TCS remains off. When the
vehicle speed drops below 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESP
system shuts off. ESP is off at low vehicle speeds in 4WD
low range so that it will not interfere with off-road
driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability
feature at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h). The ⬙ESP/
TCS Indicator Light⬙ will always be illuminated in 4WD
low range when ESP is off.
NOTE: The “ESP OFF” message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the gear selector is
placed into the “P” (Park) position from any position
other than “P” (Park), and then moved out of the “P”
(Park) position. This will occur even if the message was
previously cleared

137

WARNING!
With the ESP switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable. In
an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESP and ERM
systems will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. The “Full Off” mode is intended for offhighway or off-road use only.
ESP/BAS Warning Lamp and ESP/TCS Indicator
Light
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is
combined with the BAS indicator. The yellow
“ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” and the yellow
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position. They should go out with the engine
running.

138

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If the “ESP/BAS Warning Lamp” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or
the BAS system, or both. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48
km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to
have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• ⬙The ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ and the ⬙ESP/BAS
Warning Lamp⬙ come on momentarily each time the
ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.

REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM— IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Park Assist System provides visual and audible
indications of the distance between the rear fascia and the
detected obstacle when backing up. Refer to the Warning
Section and Note Section for limitations of this system
and recommendations.
The Rear Park Assist System will remember the last
system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the RUN/ON
position.
The Rear Park Assist System can be active only when the
shifter is in R (Reverse). If the Rear Park Assist System is
enabled at this shifter position, the system will be active
until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11
mph (18 km/h) or above. The system will be active again
if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than
approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

139

Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four Rear Park Assist Sensors, located in the rear
fascia, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The monitored area seems oval
in shape.

The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 11.8
inches (30 cm) up to 59 inches (150 cm) from the rear
fascia in the horizontal direction, depending on the
location and orientation of the obstacle and the type of
obstacle.
Rear Park Assist Warning Display
The Rear Park Assist Warning Display, located in the
headliner near the flipper glass, provides both visual and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia and the detected obstacle.

Rear Park Assist Display

When the ignition is changed to the RUN/ON position,
the warning display will turn ON all of its LEDs for
about 1 second. Each side of the warning display has 6
yellow and 2 red LEDs. The vehicle is close to the obstacle
when the red LED is ON.

140

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When the obstacle is detected at a distance of about 59
inches (150 cm) from the rear fascia, the outermost LEDs
of the warning display will be ON with increased brightness. Along with the LED, a half second tone will occur.
As the distance of the detected obstacle to the rear fascia
decreases, more LEDs are illuminated. When the warning
display has the first 5 yellow LEDs ON, the warning
display will actuate an intermittent tone for about 10
seconds. The radio will be muted while the tone is
actuated. The intermittent tone will increase in frequency
as each additional LED is lit.
When the detected obstacle is about 11.8 inches (30 cm)
from the rear fascia, the warning display will actuate a
continuous tone for about 10 seconds, and it will turn ON
all 8 LEDs, including both RED LEDs, on the corresponding side of the display. The radio will be muted while the
tone is actuated.

When the obstacle is less than 11.8 inches (30 cm) from
the rear fascia, the warning display will either have all 8
LEDs ON (obstacle detected) or it will have only the
outermost LEDs ON with decreased brightness (obstacle
not detected), depending on the location of the obstacle.
Enable/Disable the Rear Park Assist System
The Rear Park Assist System can be enabled and disabled
with a switch located in the switch bank of the instrument panel.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

141

disabled, the instrument cluster will actuate a single
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
message.
The Rear Park Assist Switch LED will be ON when the
Rear Park Assist System is disabled or defective. The
Rear Park Assist Switch LED will be OFF when the
system is enabled.

Rear Park Assist Switch

When the switch is pressed to disable the system, the
instrument cluster will display the ⬙PARK ASSIST DISABLED⬙ message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. When the
shifter is changed to R (Reverse) and the system is

Service the Rear Park Assist System
When the Rear Park Assist System is defective, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the ⬙SERVICE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM⬙ message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.

142

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Cleaning the Rear Park Assist System
Clean the Rear Park Assist Sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do
not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could
damage the sensors.

CAUTION!
• The Rear Park Assist System is only a parking aid
and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not
be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
Rear Park Assist System to be able to stop in time
when the obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using the Rear Park Assist System.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist System. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must
continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

• Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is
strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when
the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so
can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to
the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning
display turns the red LEDs ON. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

143

NOTE: Clean all four Rear Park Assist Sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors
must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia or it could provide a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia.
Assure objects are not within 11.8 inches (30 cm) from the
rear fascia while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the ⬙SERVICE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM⬙ message to be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Ultrasonic noise from airbrakes of nearby trucks, air
powered jackhammers and air powered shop tools, to
name a few, will cause the Rear Park Assist System to be
disabled until the ultrasonic noise is no longer present.

144

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

REAR CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
Vehicles with a Navigation radio may be equipped with
a rear view camera (located on the rear liftgate) that
allows you to see an on-screen image (on the navigation
radio screen) of the rear of your vehicle whenever the
vehicle is put into R (Reverse).

WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the rear camera system. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
If snow, ice, mud, or anything else builds up on the
camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth.

Turning the Rear Camera On
1. To access the rear camera mode, select “Rear Camera”
at the Systems Settings screen and press ENTER. Refer to
your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed operating
instructions.
2. Select “ON” at the “Rear Camera” screen. Highlight
“DONE” and press ENTER. The rear camera is now
enabled.
3. When the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse), the
CAUTION screen will appear, followed by an image of
the rear of the vehicle.
4. When the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse), the rear
camera mode is exited and the Navigation or Audio
screen appears again.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

145

Turning the Rear Camera Off
1. To turn the rear camera off, select “Rear Camera” at
the Systems Settings screen and press ENTER. Refer to
your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed operating
instructions.

2. Select “OFF” at the “Rear Camera” screen. Highlight
“DONE” and press ENTER. The rear camera is now
disabled.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
an optional universal garage door opener (HomeLink威),
storage for sunglasses, and optional power sunroof
switches.

Overhead Console

Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
reading lights.
Press the lens to turn these lights on. Press a second time
to turn the lights off.

146

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The lights also turn on when a front door or rear door is
opened. The lights will also turn on when the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push the finger depression on the overhead console to
open. Push the finger depression to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized

gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
NOTE: The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active.
For additional information on HomeLink威, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

147

WARNING!

A moving garage door can cause injury to people and
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features it could
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety
information or assistance.

Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.

WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.

148

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Programming HomeLink
NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is
advised to park outside the garage. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to
HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display which includes
HomeLink system messages. The EVIC is located on the
bottom of the tachometer.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, and
release only when the EVIC display shows “CHANNELS
CLEARED” (after 20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons
for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat step one to
program a second and/or third hand-held transmitter to
the remaining two HomeLink buttons.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

149

NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with
procedures noted in the ⬙Gate Operator/Canadian Programming⬙ section.
4. The EVIC display will show “CHANNEL X TRAINING” (where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3). Release both buttons
after the EVIC display shows “CHANNEL X TRAINED.”
NOTE: If the EVIC display shows “DID NOT TRAIN”
repeat steps 2–4.

HomeLink Buttons

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3
inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink
button that you want to train and the hand-held transmitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.

5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and
observe the EVIC display. If the EVIC display shows
“CHANNEL X TRANSMIT” (where X is Channel 1, 2, or
3), programming is complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and
released.

150

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat
step one.

7. Firmly press and release the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button.
(The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)

NOTE: If your hand-held transmitter appears to program the universal transceiver, but your garage door
does not operate using the transmitter and your garage
door opener was manufactured after 1995, your garage
door opener may have a multiple security code system
(rolling code system). Please proceed to steps 6–8 to
complete the programming of a rolling code equipped
device (most common garage door openers require this
step.

NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step
eight.

6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)
in the garage, locate the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.

8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two
seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button.
Repeat the ⴖpress/hold/releaseⴖ sequence a second time,
and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener
(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat
step one. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to ⬙time-out⬙ (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to ⬙time-out⬙ in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
programming a gate operator by using the ⬙Programming⬙ procedures (regardless of where you live), replace
ⴖProgramming HomeLinkⴖ step 3 with the following:
NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the
⬙cycling⬙ process to prevent possible overheating.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release every two seconds (⬙cycle⬙)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
successfully been accepted by HomeLink. The EVIC

151

display will show “CHANNEL X TRAINED” (where X is
Channel 1, 2, or 3). Proceed with ⬙Programming⬙ step
four to complete.
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time. In the event that
there are still programming difficulties or questions,
contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-3553515.
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual
buttons cannot be erased but can be ⬙reprogrammed⬙ note below), follow the step noted:

152

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons and
release only when the EVIC display shows “CHANNELS CLEARED” (after 20 seconds). Release both
buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode and
can be programmed at any time beginning with ⬙Programming⬙ - Step 2.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The EVIC display will show “CHANNEL X TRANSMIT” (where X is Channel 1, 2, or 3) for 20 seconds and
then change to “CHANNEL X TRAINING.” Without
releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with ⬙Programming⬙ Step 2.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Security
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies
by following the “Erasing HomeLink Buttons” instructions in this section.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

HomeLink威 is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.

Power Sunroof Switch

153

WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.

154

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Opening Sunroof - Express
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called
Express Open. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof - Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the

sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof - Express
Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent, and
will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express
Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the
sunroof.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

155

Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.

NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.

Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switches remain active for 10 minutes
after the ignition switch has been turned off. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.

Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.

Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.

156

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

POWER OUTLET
To the right of the convenience tray (lower center of
instrument panel) is an outlet for electrically powered
accessories. Pull lightly on the tab of the plastic cover to
access the outlet.

The rear power outlet (if equipped) is located in the left
rear cargo area.

Rear Power Outlet

Front Power Outlet

The power outlets are a direct feed from the battery so
they receive power whether the ignition is in the ON or
OFF position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

All accessories connected to this outlet should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to
protect the battery against discharge.

157

CAUTION!
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent engine
starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.

• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.

158

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CUP HOLDERS
In the center console there are two cup holders for the
front seat passengers.

cup depression towards the passenger seat, but the top
surface will not be flush with the console surface.
The rear passengers have access to two cup holders that
pull out from the lower center of the rear seat.

Front Cup Holders

NOTE: The cup holder insert is removable, from the
console, for cleaning. It can be reinstalled with the larger

Rear Cup Holders

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

159

CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Light
The cargo area light is activated by opening the liftgate,
opening any door, or by rotating the dimmer control on
the multi-function control lever to the extreme top position. If all doors are closed and only the liftgate is open,
pushing on the cargo light lens surface will turn off all
interior lamps. Push on the lens surface a second time to
restore the interior lights to normal operation.
Rear Storage Compartment
The rear storage compartment is located on the driver’s
side behind the second row seat.

Rear Storage Compartment

160

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.

Rear Cargo Cover

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

161

WARNING!
In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle
could cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden
stop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store
the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger
compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle
when taken from its mounting. Do not store in the
vehicle.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The tie-downs located on cargo area floor should be used
to safely secure loads when vehicle is moving.

Cargo Tie-Down Hooks

162

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision
a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only
the anchors provided for child seat tethers.

WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading
your vehicle:

• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or left
door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

163

WARNING!
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.

Cargo Load Floor
The panel in the load floor is reversible for added utility.
One side is carpeted and the other side features a plastic
lined tray which holds a variety of items.

Cargo Load Floor

The cargo load floor is held by spring loaded latches. In
order to use the cargo load floor, use the following
procedure:
NOTE: The cargo load floor latches should not be
used as cargo tie-downs.

164

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Flip up pull loop(s) so they are perpendicular (straight
up) to the top surface of the tray.
2. Pull up on loop(s) and twist 90 degrees, so they are
parallel to the slotted hole in tray.

wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button
is pressed. Upon release, the wipers will cycle three times
before returning to the set position.

3. Lift tray over loop(s), and reposition tray.
4. Pull up on loop(s) and twist 90 degrees, so they are
perpendicular (straight up) to the slotted hole in tray.
5. Push loop(s) back down, so they are parallel to the top
of the tray.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped
A switch on the right side of the steering column controls
operation of the rear wiper/washer function. Rotating
the switch up to the DEL (Delay) position or the ON
position will activate the wiper. Rotating the switch all
the way up or down will turn on the wash function. The

Rear Wiper/Washer Switch

If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “Park”
position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If the liftgate flipper glass is open, connection to the rear
window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the
rear wiper blade. When the liftgate flipper glass is closed,
the rear wiper switch or the ignition switch needs to be
turned OFF and ON to restart the rear wiper.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the front of
the engine compartment on the passenger side and
should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill
the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds
to flush out the residual water.
Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped
Press this button (located on the Climate Control
panel) to turn on the rear window defroster and
the heated side mirrors (if equipped). An LED in the

165

button will illuminate to indicate the rear window defroster is ON. The defroster automatically turns off after
about 10 minutes of operation.

CAUTION!
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window.
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.

166

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the rated vehicle capacity.
This vehicle is not equipped with roof rack cross rails as
built, unless ordered as optional equipment. Cross rails
must be installed prior to carrying loads on the roof rack.
If not equipped, your authorized dealer can order and
install Mopar威 cross rails built specifically for this roof
rack system or a number of after market rails that are
tailored to your life-style or activities.

NOTE: The optional cross rails have seven specific
locations identified by a feature on both the side rail and
the cross rail. Cross rails must be secured in one of the
seven detent locations on the side rail to prevent movement with a sudden stop. For improved windnoise
performance when cross rails are not in use, place them
in detent positions #2 (second detent from the front of the
vehicle) and #7 (detent closest to the rear of the vehicle)
as indicated with a unique feature on the side rails.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

167

CAUTION!

WARNING!

• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO NOT

Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in
personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof
rack “Cautions” when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.

carry any loads on the roof rack without cross rails installed. The load should be secured and placed on top of the
cross rails, not directly on the roof. If it is necessary to place
the load on the roof, place a blanket or some other protection between the load and the roof surface.

• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not exceed
the rated load capacity of your cross rail system or the roof
rack system maximum load capacity of 150 lbs (68 kg).
Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and
secure the load appropriately.

• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such as
wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.

• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when
carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind forces,
due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can add
sudden upward loads. This is especially true on large flat
loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

▫ Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

䡵 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

䡵 Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

▫ Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

▫ Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

䡵 Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

▫ Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Compass/Temperature/Trip Computer . . . . . . 191

▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

170

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

䡵 Sales Code RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-Disc) Radio
With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free Phone,
And Vehicle Entertainment Systems (VES)
Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 199
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For CD Audio
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For CD
Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3 Audio
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . 211
䡵 Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD (Single Disc)
Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And
Hands Free Phone Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 213
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . . 219
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
䡵 Sales Code REC — AM/FM/CD (6–Disc) Radio
With Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ REC Setting The Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
▫ Audio Clock Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
䡵 Video Entertainment System (Sales Code XRV) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

171

䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

䡵 Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped . . 230

▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In REF Radios . . . . . . 228
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In RAQ Radios . . . . . 228
▫ Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . . 229
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 232
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

▫ PTY Button ⬙Scan⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

▫ Automatic Temperature Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

▫ PTY Button ⬙Seek⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

172

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

173

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Gasoline Engine

174

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Diesel Engine

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION
1. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Brake Warning Light
The BRAKE warning light will come on when
the ignition is first turned on, and stay on
briefly as a bulb check. If the bulb does not
come on during starting, have the bulb repaired promptly. If the light stays on longer, it may be an
indication that the parking brake has not been released.
If the light remains on when the parking brake is off, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction
or low fluid level. In this case, the light will remain on
until the cause is corrected. If a brake malfunction is
indicated, immediate repair is necessary and continued
operation of the vehicle in this condition is dangerous.

175

3. Turn Signal Indicator Light
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled about one mile with the turn signals on, a chime
will sound to alert you to turn the signals off. If either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
4. High Beam Indicator Light
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
5. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will
illuminate when the key is in the ON position before

176

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning
the key from OFF to ON, have the condition checked
promptly.

during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.

Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.

7. Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System.
The light will turn on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.

The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
6. Airbag Warning Light
This light turns on and remains on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

8. Tachometer
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions-per-minute (r.p.m. x 1000) for each
gear range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the
accelerator.
9. Security Alarm System Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds
when the vehicle theft alarm is arming. The light will
flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set.
The security light will also come on for about three
seconds when the ignition is first turned on.
10. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light shows low engine oil pressure. The light
should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
continuous chime will sound when this light turns on.

177

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
11. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
This indicator light starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions. The “ESP/TCS Indicator
Light” will flash any time the ESP or TCS is active and
helping to improve vehicle stability. If the “ESP/TCS
Indicator Light” is on solid, the ESP system has been
turned off by the driver or a temporary condition exists
that will not allow full ESP function.

178

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

12. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” when one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” illuminates, you should stop
and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire

failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more tire pressures is low. The
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 60 seconds when a system fault is detected.
The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the
fault condition is removed and reset.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
13. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

179

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads (H),
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately, and call for service.

180

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, refer to Section 7 of this manual. Follow the
warnings under “Cooling System Pressure Cap.”
14. Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” later in this section.
15. TOW/HAUL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the TOW/
HAUL button has been selected. The TOW/
HAUL button is located in the center of the
instrument panel (below the climate controls).

16. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Warning
Light/Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light
The ESP/BAS warning light in the instrument
cluster comes on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position. The light should
go out with the engine running. If the ESP/
BAS warning light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected in either
the ESP or the BAS system. If this light stays illuminated,
have the ESP and BAS checked at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
17. 4WD LOW Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the 4WD LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

18. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check.
During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or
when driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash
or remain on continuously. Refer to ⬙Enhanced Driver
Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert)⬙ in the Occupant
Restraints section for more information.
19. Cruise Indicator Light
This indicator lights when the speed control
system is turned ON.
20. Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the

181

correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
21. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
gear selection.
22. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
23. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control system. If a problem
is detected the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when
the vehicle has completely stopped and the gear selector

182

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

is placed in the P (Park) position. The light should turn
off. If the light remains lit with the engine running your
vehicle will usually be drivable, however, see your dealer
for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing
when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing. The light will come on when the ignition
is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check.
If the light does not come on during starting, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
24. Front Fog Light Indicator Light— If Equipped
This light shows the front fog lights are ON.
25. Voltage Warning Light
This light monitors the electrical system voltage.
The light should turn on momentarily as the

engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on while
driving, it indicates a problem with the charging system.
Immediate service should be obtained.
26. Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.3 U.S.
Gallons (8.7 Liters) this light will come on and
remain on until fuel is added. The Low Fuel
Warning Light may turn on and off again, especially
during and after hard braking, accelerations, or turns.
This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the tank.
Also, a single chime will sound.
27. Glow Plug Indicator Light — Diesel Only
This light will illuminate when the ignition
switch is first turned to the ON position. Wait
until the light turns off before starting the
vehicle. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in Section 5 of this manual.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
— IF EQUIPPED

183

• TURN SIGNAL ON
• PERFORM SERVICE
• KEY NOT PROGRAMMED — DAMAGED KEY
• KEY NOT PROGRAMMED — INVALID KEY
• KEY NOT PROGRAMMED — EXCEEDED KEY PROGRAM LIMIT
• PROGRAMMING ACTIVE — NEW KEY PROGRAMMED
• SERVICE SECURITY KEY
• INVALID KEY — TRY ALTERNATE KEY

The electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) located
in the instrument cluster, when the appropriate conditions exist, will display the following messages and
symbols. Some of the messages are accompanied by a
chime.

• DRIVER/PASSENGER DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
• LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN (with graphic)
• X DOORS OPEN (with graphic)
• LIFTGATE OPEN (with graphic)

184

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• LIFTGATE/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)

• LIFTGLASS/HOOD OPEN (with graphic)

• LIFTGATE/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)

• WASHER FLUID LOW (with graphic)

• LIFTGLASS OPEN (with graphic)

• CHECK GAUGES

• HOOD OPEN (with graphic)

• AUTO HIGHBEAM ON

• HOOD/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)

• AUTO HIGHBEAM OFF

• HOOD/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)

• PARK ASSIST DISABLED

• LIFTGATE/HOOD OPEN (with graphic)

• SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM

• HOOD/GLASS/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)

• TRANSMISSION OVER TEMP

• HOOD/GLASS/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)

• CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURE

• HOOD/GATE/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)

• SERVICE 4WD SYSTEM

• HOOD/GATE/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)

• 4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL

• LIFTGLASS/DOOR OPEN (with graphic)

• LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL

• LIFTGLASS/DOORS OPEN (with graphic)

• WARNING! LIMIT SPEED

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

185

• CHECK GAS CAP

• SERVICE TIRE PRESS SYSTEM

• ESP OFF

• LEFT FRONT LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System Only)

• MEMORY #1 POSITIONS SET
• MEMORY #2 POSITIONS SET
• MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED — SEATBELT FASTENED (with graphic)
• MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED — VEHICLE NOT IN
PARK
• DRIVER 1 MEMORY
• DRIVER 2 MEMORY
• PEDAL ADJUST DISABLED — CRUISE CONTROL
SET
• PEDAL ADJUST DISABLED — SHIFTER IN REVERSE

• RIGHT FRONT LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System Only)
• LEFT REAR LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System
Only)
• RIGHT REAR LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System Only)
• SPARE LOW PRESSURE (Premium TPM System
Only)
• WATER IN FUEL (Diesel Models Only)

186

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Customer Programmable Features
Press the MENU button until one of the display choices
following appears:

Language?
When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
computer functions. Press the STEP button while in this
display selects English, Espanol, or Francais. As you
continue the displayed information will be shown in the
selected language.

Menu Button

Step Button

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Display U.S. or Metric?
Pressing the STEP button when in this display selects US
or Metric. The overhead console and instrument panel
displays will be in the selected units.
Auto Door Locks?
When this feature is selected, all doors and the liftgate
lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches
15 mph (25 km/h). Pressing the STEP button when in this
display will select “Yes” or “No.”
Auto Unlock On Exit? (Available Only When the
AUTO DOOR LOCKS Feature is Turned On )
When this feature is selected all the vehicle’s doors will
unlock when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is

187

stopped and the transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position. Pressing the STEP button when in this
display will select “Yes” or “No.”
Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st?
When this feature is selected only the driver’s door will
unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button and require a second press to unlock the
remaining locked doors and liftgate. When REMOTE
UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors and
the liftgate will unlock at the first press of the remote
keyless entry unlock button. Pressing the STEP button
when in this display will select DRIVER’S DOOR 1ST or
ALL DOORS.

188

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Remote Linked To Memory? (Available with
Memory Seat Only)
When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror,
and radio settings will return to the memory set position
when the remote keyless entry “Unlock” button is
pressed. If this feature is not selected then the memory
seat, mirror, and radio settings can only return to the
memory set position using the door mounted switch.
Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select
“Yes” or “No.”
Sound Horn With Lock?
When this feature is selected a short horn sound will
occur when the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is
pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the
flash lights on lock/unlock feature. Pressing the STEP
button when in this display will select “Yes” or “No.”

Flash Lights With Lock?
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
using the remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature
may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock
feature selected. Pressing the STEP button when in this
display will select “Yes” or “No.”
Headlamp Delay
When this feature is selected the driver can choose, when
exiting the vehicle, to have the headlamps remain on for
30, 60, or 90 seconds, or not remain on. Pressing the STEP
button when in this display will select 30, 60, 90, or OFF.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Illuminated Approach?
When this feature is selected the driver can choose, when
entering the vehicle, to have the headlamps come on for
30, 60, or 90 seconds, or not come on at all. Pressing the
STEP button when in this display will select 30, 60, 90, or
OFF.
Auto Headlamp Low/High Beams? (Available with
SmartBeam Only)
When this feature is selected and the headlight switch
has been moved to the A (Auto) position, the headlights
will automatically switch from high to low beams when
approaching a vehicle. Pressing the STEP button when in
this display will select “Low Beam” or “Low/High
Beam.” Refer to “Lights — SmartBeams” in Section 3 of
this manual.
NOTE: System will activate at or above 20 mph (32
km/h).

189

Headlamps On With Wipers? (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When this feature is selected and the headlight switch
has at least once been moved to the A (Auto) position, the
headlights will turn on when the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on in this way. Pressing the
STEP button when in this display will select “Yes” or
“No.”
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3 of this manual.
Front Wipers Rain Sense? (Available with Rain
Sensing Wipers Only)
Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select
“Manual” or “Rain Sense.”

190

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Service Interval
Gasoline Models — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, a service interval between
2,000 (3 200 km) and 6,000 miles (10 000 km) in 500 mile
(800 km) increments may be selected. Pressing the STEP
button when in this display will select distances between
2,000 (3 200 km) and 6,000 miles (10 000 km) in 500 mile
(800 km) increments.
Diesel Models — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, a service interval between
2,500 (4 000 km) and 12,500 miles (20 000 km) in 625 mile
(1 000 km) increments may be selected. Pressing the STEP
button when in this display will select distances between
2,500 (4 000 km) and 12,500 miles (20 000 km) in 625 mile
(1 000 km) increments.

Reset Service Distance (Displays Only if Service
Interval was Changed)
When this feature is selected the current accumulated
service distance can be reset to the newly selected service
interval. Pressing the STEP button when in this display
will select “Yes” or “No.”
Easy Entry/Exit Seat? (Available with Memory Seat
Only)
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning
which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the
vehicle.
The Easy Entry/ Easy Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/
Easy Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Pressing the STEP button
when in this display will select “Yes” or “No.” The seat
will return to the memorized seat location (if REMOTE

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

191

LINK TO MEMORY is set to YES) when the remote
keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the door. For
more information, refer to “Easy Entry/Exit Seat —
Driver Memory Seat” in Section 3 of this manual. (See
page 110 for more information.)
Compass/Temperature/Trip Computer
This display provides the outside temperature, one of the
eight compass headings to indicate the direction the
vehicle is facing, and vehicle trip information. The compass and temperature display is the normal display.
When the C/T button is pressed the compass/
temperature display returns.

Compass/Temperature Button

192

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING!
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above
32°F ( 0°C), the road surface may be icy, particularly
in woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such
conditions to prevent an accident and possible personal injury or property damage.

Compass/Temperature Display

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

193

Trip Computer
This feature, located in the instrument cluster, displays
the following information when the display is in the
“Compass/Temperature” mode and the STEP button is
pressed:
Step Button
Press the STEP button to cycle through all of the
Compass/Mini-Trip Computer displays.

Step Button

194

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Reset Button
Press the RESET button to reset the display you are in.
Press and hold the RESET button (for 2 seconds) to reset
all of the displays.

Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
Distance To Empty
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This is calibrated using the
miles per gallon during the last driving period.
Trip A
Shows the total distance travelled for trip A since the last
reset.

Reset Button

Trip B
Shows the total distance travelled for trip B since the last
reset.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Elapsed Time
Shows the accumulated ignition ON time since the last
reset.
Tire Pressure Display — If Equipped
Shows the current pressure of all 4 road tires.

195

NOTE: Tires heat up during normal driving conditions.
Heat will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6
psi (14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Refer
to “Tire Inflation Pressures” in Section 5 for additional
information.
Miles to Service
Shows the distance remaining to require service.
NOTE: This display can be reset to the set service
interval by pressing and holding the RESET button for 3
seconds.
Blank Screen
Shows a blank screen. Pressing the C/T button returns to
the compass/temperature display.

Tire Pressure Display

Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” symbol
does not appear, you must manually put the compass
into the “Calibration” mode.

196

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: To ensure proper compass calibration, make
sure the compass variance is properly set before manually calibrating the compass. Refer to Variance Map.
To Put Into a Calibration Mode
Start the engine and leave the transmission in the P (Park)
position. Set the display to “Compass/Temperature.”
Press and hold the C/T button for approximately 5
seconds to change the display to compass variance mode;
holding the button for an additional 5 seconds will flash
the “CAL” symbol indicating compass calibration mode.
When the “CAL” indicator is flashing, complete one or
more 360 degree turns, under 5 mph (8 km/h), in an area
free from large metal objects or power lines. The “CAL”
indicator will turn off and the compass will function
normally.

Compass/Temperature Button

Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
north and geographic north. In some areas of the country,
the difference between magnetic and geographic north is
great enough to cause the compass to give false readings.
If this occurs, the compass variance must be set according
to the Compass Variance Map.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

197

To set the variance: Turn the ignition ON and set the
display to “Compass/Temperature.” Press the C/T button for approximately 5 seconds. The last variance zone
number will be displayed. Press and hold the STEP
button for 1 second to select the new variance zone and
press the RESET button to resume normal operation.
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile operation and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “apparent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio signals.

198

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.

FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if
equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped)
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SALES CODE RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO
WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO, HANDS
FREE PHONE, AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEMS (VES) CAPABILITIES
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.

199

Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.

RAQ Radio

200

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Satellite Radio, or Vehicle Entertainment
System (VES) (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers

will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
MSG or INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station (one
with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio
Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode
only).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.

201

RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.

202

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.

turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will
allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio
stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.

Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or
left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side
speakers.

Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:

Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance and fade.
RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button or

Program Type
No program type or
undefined
Adult Hits
Alert Alert
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Emergency Test
Foreign Language
Information

16 Digit-Character Display
None
Adult_Hits
Alert Alert
Classical
Classic_Rock
College
Country
Emergency Test
Foreign_Language
Information

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather

Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm_and_Blues
Religious_Music
Religious_Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft_Rock
Soft_R_&_B
Sports
Talk
Top_40
Weather

203

By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
SET/DIR Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET/DIR
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET/DIR
button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into push-button memory.

204

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12
FM and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.

Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio
Play)

Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.

Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.

Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks
and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.

205

SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 10 seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.

206

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio
Play)

Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.

LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the
CD into the player.

Press and hold the LOAD/ EJT button for 5 seconds and
all CDs will be ejected from the radio.

Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading, and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
LOAD / EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 10 seconds. If no discs are inserted
within 10 seconds “NO DISCS LOADED” will be displayed.
On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and
ignition OFF.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.

207

RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.

TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.

Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature.

AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.

Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.

208

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 15

• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.

MPEG Specification

Sampling Frequency (kHz)

MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3

48, 44.1, 32

MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3

24, 22.05, 16

209

Bit rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8

210

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs

• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 Audio
Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
MP3 File. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays
the beginning of the MP3 file. Pressing the button within
the first ten seconds plays the previous file.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading.
LOAD / EJECT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.

211

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
MSG or INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc.
The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to
⬙elapsed time⬙ priority mode.

212

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the
message display priority mode or elapsed time display
priority mode will display the song title for each file.

Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.

RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the MP3 selection.

Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.

TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.

Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES威) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES威)
Guide.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC)
RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND
HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.

213

REF Radio

For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.

214

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF,
or turning ON/OFF the ignition, will cancel the MUTE
feature.

NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in either, AM, FM, or Satellite
(if equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan
through preset stations in either, AM, FM, or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the
search, press PSCAN a second time.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will display for
5 seconds.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.

215

TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.

216

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.

selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.

Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.

Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
RND/SET Button (Radio Mode) To SET The
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Preset Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operation Instructions - CD Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track one.
NOTE:
• On some vehicles, you may insert or eject a disc with
the radio or ignition switch OFF.

217

• If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player.
• This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks.
SEEK Button (CD Mode)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track
on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the
beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10
seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers.

218

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SCAN Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
EJECT Button (CD Mode)
Press this button and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. The
unit will switch to the last selected mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
TIME Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for 5 seconds.
RW/FF (CD Mode)
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
(Reverse) button works in a similar manner.

RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD
Mode)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

219

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize
the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play
through the vehicle speakers.

MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers.

The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical
device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3.5
mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases
the MODE button until AUX appears on the display.

SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.

NOTE: The radio will return to the last stored mode if
the ignition switch is turned from the OFF/LOCK position to the ACC position, the radio is turned on, and the
radio was previously in the AUX mode.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.

EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.

PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.

220

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for 5 seconds.

Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If
Equipped
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s
Manual.

RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.

SALES CODE REC — AM/FM/CD (6–DISC) RADIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

RND/SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Mode Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If
Equipped
Refer to the “HANDS FREE PHONE (UConnect™)”
section of the Owner’s Manual.
REC Radio

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3
Capability (REC) - combines a Global-Positioning
System-based navigation system with an integrated color
screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection
menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes, AM/FM stereo radio and six-disc CD
changer with MP3 capability.
Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a
DVD that is loaded into the unit. One map DVD covers
all of North America. Refer to your “Navigation User’s
Manual” for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If
Equipped)
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.

221

REC Setting the Clock
GPS Clock
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The
satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone
and daylight savings information is set.

222

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. At the Main Menu screen, highlight “Clock Setup”
and press ENTER OR press and hold for 3 seconds the
TIME button on the unit’s faceplate. The Clock Setup
screen appears.

3. To adjust the time zone, Select “Time Zone” and press
ENTER. Select the appropriate time zone and press
ENTER.
4. To turn daylight savings on or off, select “Daylight
Savings” and press ENTER. Select “On” or “Off” and
press ENTER.
5. Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode. Press
ENTER to save your changes. If you press CANCEL or
NAV then your changes will not be saved.
User Defined Clock
If you wish to set the clock to a time different than the
system clock, you can manually adjust the time by
choosing the “User Defined Clock” option.

2. To show the GPS clock, select “Displayed Clock: GPS
Clock” and press ENTER.

1. At the Clock Setup screen highlight “Displayed
Clock: User Defined Clock”.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

223

3. To decrease the clock by one hour, use the Select
Encoder to highlight the “-” sign. Press ENTER. Press
ENTER again to decrease the clock by another hour.
4. To increase the clock by minutes, make sure “MIN +”
is highlighted and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to
increase the clock by another minute.
5. To decrease the clock by minutes, use the Select
Encoder to highlight the “-“ sign. Press ENTER. Press
ENTER again to decrease the clock by another minute.
2. To increase the clock by hours, make sure “HR +” is
highlighted and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to
increase the clock by another hour. You will see on the
“User Defined Time” display the number of hours you
have increased the clock by.

6. Select “DONE” to exit from the clock setting mode.
Press ENTER to save your changes. If you press CANCEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved.
Audio Clock Display
Select this option to change the size of the clock on the
audio screens.

224

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. When you are at an audio screen, quickly press the
TIME button on the navigation faceplate.

3. To switch the clock to the small clock, quickly press
TIME again.

2. In this example the large clock appears on the screen.

4. To toggle back to the large clock, simply press TIME.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (SALES CODE
XRV) — IF EQUIPPED
The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) consists of a DVD player and LCD (liquid crystal display)
screen, a battery-powered remote control, and two headsets. The DVD player is mounted in the rear of the center
console storage bin, and is concealed by a door that lifts
up for access. Refer to your VES™ User’s Manual for
detailed operating instructions.

225

DVD Player Location

226

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The LCD screen is located on the headliner behind the
front seats.

Remote Control Location
Lowering the DVD Screen

SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satellite Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music,

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
System Activation
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following information available when activating your system:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Credit card information.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:

227

ESN/SID Access with REC Radios
Refer to the “Navigation User’s Manual” for details on
satellite radio operation.
ESN/SID Access with REF Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the Eject or CD Eject (depending on
the radio type) and Time buttons simultaneously for 3
seconds. The first four digits of the twelve-digit ESN/SID
number will be displayed. Press the SEEK UP button to
display the next four digits. Continue to press the SEEK
UP button until all twelve ESN/SID digits have been
displayed. The SEEK DOWN will page down until the
first four digits are displayed. The radio will exit the
ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the
ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any
button was pushed.

228

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ESN/SID Access with RAQ Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID numbers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed.
Selecting Satellite Mode in REF Radios
Press the MODE button repeatedly until ⬙S A⬙ appears in
the display. A CD may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
Selecting Satellite Mode in RAQ Radios
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word
⬙SIRIUS⬙ appears in the display. These radios will also
display the following:
• After 3 seconds, the current channel name and channel
number will be displayed for 5 seconds.

• The current program type and channel number will
then be displayed for 5 seconds.
• The current channel number will then be displayed
until an action occurs.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE buttons to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word ⬙SCAN⬙ will

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-5397474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblocking. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 10 AM and 10 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 10 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button — If
Equipped
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.

229

PTY Button ⴖSCANⴖ
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
⬙SCAN⬙ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the ⬙SCAN⬙
button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Pressing the ⬙SEEK⬙ or ⬙SCAN⬙ button while
performing a music type scan will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
PTY Button ⴖSEEKⴖ
When the desired program is obtained, press the ⬙SEEK⬙
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.

230

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception on vehicles available with
a luggage rack, do not place items on the roof around the
rooftop antenna location. Metal objects placed within the
line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be placed as far
forward as possible. Do not place items directly on or
above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.

• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/TAPE/
CD, Etc.).
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.

231

Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset push-button.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.

232

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single disc CD player. However, when a
multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the
player.

5. Store the disc in its case after playing.

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:

RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being On in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System — If
Equipped
The controls for the heating/air conditioning and ventilation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary
knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired
interior conditions.

233

The instrument panel features four dual-vane airflow
registers. Two registers are located on the outer ends of
the instrument panel and two are located in the center of
the instrument panel. These registers can be closed to
partially block airflow, and they can be adjusted to direct
airflow where the occupant desires.
Blower Control
The rotary knob on the left controls the
blower and can be set in one of four
speeds and OFF. The blower fan motor will remain on until the system is
turned to the OFF position or the
ignition is turned OFF.

Manual Air Conditioning and Heating Controls

234

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Temperature Control
The temperature of air can be selected
by rotating the temperature control
knob in the center. The coldest temperature setting is on the extreme left
and the warmest setting on the extreme right of the rotation. The knob
can be positioned at any point on the
dial.
Mode Control
The mode selector (the right rotary
knob) can be placed in several positions. Dots between each of the mode
selections identify intermediate modes
that allow the occupants to fine tune
airflow distribution.

Defrost
Air is directed to the windshield through the
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also
directed to the front door windows through the side
window demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered to the
floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained.
Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
also directed to the front door windows through the
side window demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered
to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be
maintained.
Floor
Air flows through the floor outlets located under
the instrument panel and into the rear seating area

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

through vents under the front seats. Some airflow is
delivered to defrost while in the floor mode so that
comfort can be maintained.
Bi-Level
Air flows both through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and those located on the floor. Air
flows through the registers in the back of the center
console, and under the front seats to the rear seat
passengers. These registers can be closed to partially
block airflow. The center console outlets deliver conditioned air while the floor outlets deliver heated air.
Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel. Air flows through the registers in the
back of the center console to the rear seat passengers.
These registers can be closed to block airflow.

235

Recirculation
The recirculation feature can be selected with
the mode control knob. You may choose between Bi-Level Recirculation and Panel Recirculation air outlets while in this mode. Normally, air enters from outside the vehicle. However, when
in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle is re-used.
Use this mode to rapidly cool the inside of the vehicle.
The Recirculation mode can also be used to temporarily
block out outside odors, smoke, and dust.
Air Conditioning Operation
To turn on the Air Conditioning, set the fan control
at any speed and press the snowflake button
located on the control panel. Conditioned air will
be directed through the outlets selected by the mode
control. A light in the snowflake button shows that the air
conditioning is on.

236

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed
when the air conditioning compressor is on. This is a
normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and
off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy.
Automatic Temperature Control — If Equipped
The Infrared Dual-Zone Climate Control System automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by
the driver and passenger. This is accomplished by a dual
sun-sensor in the top of the instrument panel, and an
infrared sensor located in the face of the control unit.
There are also various sensors monitored by this system
which take account for vehicle speed, A/C pressure,
outside temperature, and engine cooling temperature.
The infrared sensor independently measures the surface
temperature of the driver and passenger. Based on the
sensor input, the system automatically adjusts the air
flow temperature, the air flow volume, and amount of
outside air recirculation. This maintains a comfortable
temperature even under changing conditions.

Automatic Temperature Controls

NOTE: The numbers on the temperature dial represent
a comfort setting when the Mode knob is set to Auto, and
not the actual air temperature.
Operation of the system is quite simple. Begin by turning
the right mode knob to AUTO, and place the blower
control (left knob) to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO. The

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occupants only. The HI AUTO position should be used when
more air flow is desired, or when rear seat occupants are
present. Dial in the comfort setting you would like the
system to maintain by rotating the driver’s or passenger’s
control knob. Once the comfort level is selected the
system will maintain that level automatically using the
heating system. Should the desired comfort level require
air conditioning, the system will automatically make the
adjustment.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the OFF position on the fan control stops the system
completely.
NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any
time without affecting automatic control operation. However, if the driver and/or passenger temperature knobs
are set to the full hot or full cold positions, the air

237

temperature out of the ducts will be full hot or full cold
respectively. With the temperature setting in these positions, the system does not attempt automatic comfort
control.
The air conditioning in this system is automatic.
Pressing this button while in AUTO mode will
cause the LED to flash three times and remain off.
This indicates that the system is in AUTO and requesting
the air conditioning is not necessary.
The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing this button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode.
This can be used when outside conditions such
as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. This
will cause the LED to illuminate.
NOTE:
• The surface of the climate control panel, and the top
center of the instrument panel should be kept free of

238

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

debris due to the climate control sensor’s location.
Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation
of this system.
• To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will
remain off until the engine warms up. However, the
fan will engage immediately if the defrost mode is
selected or if you manually select a blower speed.
• Under certain conditions (after the vehicle is turned
off) the climate control system may recalibrate and a
noise may be heard for 20 seconds. This is part of
normal operation.
• Most of the time, when in Automatic operation, you
can temporarily put the system into recirculation
mode by pressing the Recirc button. However, under
certain conditions in automatic the system is blowing
air out of the defrost vents. When these conditions are

present and the Recirc button is pressed the indicator
will flash and remain off. This tells you that you are
unable to go into recirculation mode at this time. If you
would like to go to Recirculation mode, you must first
move your mode knob to panel, panel/floor or floor,
then hit the Recirc button. This feature will reduce the
possibility of window fogging.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic with Manual Air Temperature
Control and Manual. This means the customer can override the blower, mode and disable automatic temperature
control completely.
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart below for details.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

239

240

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: Regardless of the type of operation, when a
temperature knob is set to the full clockwise or full
counterclockwise position, the system will deliver full
hot or full cold air out of the ducts, respectively.
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting and
select the direction of the air by rotating the right mode
knob to one of the following positions. When the Mode is
set to any position other than AUTO, the automatic
control of air temperature is disabled. The user must
adjust the temperature knobs to obtain the desired temperature.
• Defrost
Air is directed to the windshield through the
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also
directed to the front door windows through the side
window demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered to
the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be
maintained.

NOTE: The defrost mode is not automatically selected.
It must be manually selected, when desired.
• Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air
is also directed to the front door windows
through the side window demister grilles. Some airflow is delivered to the floor while in defrost so that
comfort can be maintained.
• Floor
Air flows through the floor outlets located under
the instrument panel and into the rear seating
area through vents under the front seats. Some airflow
is delivered to defrost while in floor mode, so that
comfort can be maintained.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Bi-Level
Air flows both through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and those located on the floor.
Air flows through the registers in the back of the
center console, and under the front seats to the rear
seat passengers. These registers can be closed to block
airflow. The center console outlets deliver conditioned
air while the floor outlets deliver heated air.
• Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel. Air flows through the registers in
the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers can be closed to block airflow.
Depress this button to turn on and off the air
conditioning during manual operation only. Conditioned outside air is then directed through the

241

outlets selected on the mode control dial. The button
includes an LED that illuminates when manual operation
is selected.
NOTE: To manually control the air conditioning the
mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position.
This button can be used to block out smoke,
odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling
is desired. The recirculation mode should only
be used temporarily. The button includes an
LED that illuminates, which indicates that the recirculation mode is active. You may use this feature separately.

242

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the
windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to
fog, press the “Recirculate” icon button to return to
outside air. Some temp./humidity conditions will cause
captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
“Recirculate” to be selected while in the defrost or
defrost/floor modes. Attempting to use the recirculation
while in these modes will cause the LED in the button to
blink and then turn off.

As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature
control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
defrost mode.

Operating Tips

Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.

Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases
turning on the Air-conditioning (pressing the snowflake
button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control,
air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort.

Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50 %
concentration is recommended. Refer to Recommended
Fluids and Genuine Parts for the proper coolant type.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic
in hot weather especially when towing a trailer, additional engine cooling may be required. If this situation is
encountered, operate the transmission in a lower gear to
increase engine RPM, coolant flow and fan speed. When
stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to shift into
N (Neutral) and depress the accelerator slightly for fast
idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed.
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial
Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.

243

Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstructions.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

244

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operating Tips Chart

STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

▫ Rocking The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

▫ Normal Starting — Gasoline Engines . . . . . . . 249

䡵 Four-Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

▫ Quadra-Trac I威 Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

▫ Normal Starting — Diesel Engines . . . . . . . . . 250
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 253
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . . 254
▫ 5–Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

▫ Quadra-Trac II威 Operating
Instructions/Precautions — If Equipped . . . . . 262
▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
▫ Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
▫ Quadra-Drive II威 System — If Equipped . . . . . 267
䡵 On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

246

STARTING AND OPERATING

䡵 Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

▫ When To Use 4WD Low Range —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
䡵 Multi Displacement System (MDS) - 5.7L Engine
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 283
䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . . 290
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

STARTING AND OPERATING

247

▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 295

䡵 Flexible Fuel (4.7L Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . 309

▫ Base System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 300

▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

▫ 3.7/4.7L Engines (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ 5.7L Engines (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

248

STARTING AND OPERATING

䡵 Fuel Requirements — Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 332

▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

▫ Towing – 2WD Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

▫ Towing — Quadra-Trac I (Single-Speed Transfer
Case) 4WD Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

▫ Towing — Quadra–Trac II /Quadra–Drive II 4WD
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
䡵 Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING PROCEDURE
Start the engine with the selector lever in the N (Neutral)
or P (Park) position. Apply the brake before shifting to
any driving range.
Normal Starting — Gasoline Engines
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition key briefly
to START position, and release it. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself
when the engine is running.
NOTE: The starter motor may run up to 30 seconds in
very cold conditions until the engine is started. The
starter can be disengaged by turning the ignition key to
the OFF position, if required.

249

If Engine Fails to Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
normal starting procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there
while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
NOTE: To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.

250

STARTING AND OPERATING

If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the normal starting procedure should be
repeated.

depending on engine temperature. When the “Glow Plug
Indicator Light” goes out, the engine is ready to start.

WARNING!

3. Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition key
briefly to START position, and release it. The starter
motor will continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running.

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.

NOTE: The starter motor may run up to 30 seconds in
very cold conditions until the engine is started. The
starter can be disengaged by turning the ignition key to
the OFF position, if required.

Normal Starting — Diesel Engines
1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
2. Watch for the “Glow Plug Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in
Section 4. It will glow for two to ten seconds or more,

4. After the engine starts, allow it to idle for approximately 30 seconds before driving. This allows oil to
circulate and lubricate the turbocharger.

STARTING AND OPERATING

Starting and Operating Cautions — Diesel Engines

WARNING!
NEVER pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle.
This could result in a flash fire causing serious
personal injury.
• Running a cold engine at high speeds during driving
or idling may damage engine components.
• Before turning off your turbo diesel engine, always
allow the engine to return to normal idle speed and

251

run for several seconds. This assures proper lubrication of the turbocharger. This is particularly necessary after any period of hard driving.
Turbocharger “Cool Down”
NOTE: Letting the engine idle after extended operation
allows the turbine housing to cool to normal operating
temperature.
The following chart should be used as a guide in determining the amount of engine idle time required to
sufficiently cool down the turbocharger before shut
down, depending upon the type of driving and the
amount of cargo.

252

STARTING AND OPERATING

Driving Conditions
Stop & Go
Stop & Go
Highway Speeds
City Traffic
Highway Speeds
Uphill Grade

TURBOCHARGER ⬙COOL DOWN⬙ CHART
Load
Turbocharger Temperature
Empty
Medium
Medium
Max. GCWR
Max. GCWR
Max. GCWR

Cool
Warm
Warm
Warm
Warm
Hot

Idle Time (in minutes)
Before Shut Down
Less than 1
1
2
3
4
5

STARTING AND OPERATING

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with grounded,
three wire extension cord.
Use the heater when temperatures below 0°F (-18°C) are
expected to last for several days.
The engine block heater cord is located:
• 3.7L/4.7L Engine — coiled and strapped to the engine
oil dipstick tube.
• 5.7L Engine — bundled and fastened to the injector
harness.

WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt AC electrical cord could
cause electrocution.

253

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into P (Park) only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of R (Reverse) only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from R (Reverse), P (Park), or N
(Neutral) into any forward gear when the engine
is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.

254

STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P
(Park) or N (Neutral) if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out
of P (Park) and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON position. Always depress the brake
pedal first, before moving the gear selector out of P
(Park).
5–Speed Automatic Transmission
The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles.

STARTING AND OPERATING

255

gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the
engine if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first.
P (Park)
This gear position supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be started in
this range. Never use P (Park) while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range. Always apply parking brake first,
then place the selector in P (Park) position.

WARNING!
Automatic Shift Controls

Gear Ranges
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold. If
there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the
key to the LOCK position before restarting. Transmission

Never use P (Park) position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.

256

STARTING AND OPERATING

N (Neutral)
Shift into N (Neutral) when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you
must leave the vehicle.
NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with selector lever in N (Neutral) can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in Section 5 and “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in
Section 6 of this manual.
D (Drive)
The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth
gear. The D (Drive) position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
Electronic Range Select (ERS)Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows
you to move the shifter left (-) or right (+) when the
shifter is in the D (Drive) position, allowing the selection

STARTING AND OPERATING

of the desired top gear. For example, if the driver shifts
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
never shift above third gear, but can shift down to 2
(second) or 1 (first), when needed.
On vehicles equipped with 4.7L or 5.7L engines, use of
ERS (or Tow/Haul mode) also enables a additional
underdrive gear which is not normally used during
through-gear accelerations. This additional grade improves vehicle performance and cooling capability when
towing a trailer on certain grades. In ERS mode (on all
transmissions), 1st through 3rd gear are underdrive gears
and 4th gear is direct drive. ERS 5th gear (Overdrive) is
the same as the normal 4th gear.

257

WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid.
Screen Display
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed

1
1

2
1-2

3
1-3

4
1-4

5*
1-5

D
1-5

* Applies to vehicles equipped with 4.7L/5.7L engines
only.
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), move the shift lever to the
left “D(-)” and hold it there. The transmission will shift to
the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed
down.

258

STARTING AND OPERATING

Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (5th gear for 3.7L engine, 4th and
5th gears for 4.7L and 5.7L engines). The transmission
will automatically shift from direct gear to Overdrive if
the following conditions are present:
• the transmission selector is in D (Drive);
• the engine coolant has reached normal operating temperature;
• vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48
km/h);
• the “TOW/HAUL” button has not been activated;
• transmission has reached normal operating temperature.
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive

and will automatically select the most desirable gear for
operation at this temperature. Normal operation will
resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the Note under
torque converter clutch, later in this section.
During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission
temperature. This feature improves the warm up time of
the engine and transmission.
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
temperature becomes hot enough, the “TRANSMISSION
OVER TEMP” message may display and the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After cool down, the transmission will
resume normal operation.

STARTING AND OPERATING

259

In high ambient temperatures with sustained high engine
speed and load, an upshift followed shortly thereafter by
a downshift may occur. This is a normal part of the
overheat protection strategy when operating in the
“Tow/Haul” mode.
The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to the
most desirable gear if the accelerator pedal is fully
depressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph
(56 km/h).
When To Use “TOW/HAUL” Mode — If Equipped
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the “TOW/HAUL” button. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
operating in “TOW/HAUL” mode, the transmission will
shift to direct gear and Overdrive will be enabled under
steady cruise conditions.

5
Tow/Haul Button

The “TOW/HAUL” light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. If the “TOW/HAUL” mode is desired,
the switch must be pressed each time the engine is
started.

260

STARTING AND OPERATING

Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, the transmission limp home mode
will be engaged. In this mode, the transmission will
remain in the current gear (3.7L engine) or in direct gear
(4.7L and 5.7L engines) until the vehicle is brought to a
stop.
To reset the transmission, use the following procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. Turn off the engine, be sure to turn the key to the
LOCK position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, then restart the engine.
5. Move the shift lever to the desired gear range.

If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation. If the problem persists, P
(Park), R (Reverse), and N (Neutral) will continue to
operate. Only 2nd gear (3.7L engine) or 3rd gear (4.7L
and 5.7L engines) will be available in the D (Drive)
position. Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature, designed to improve fuel economy, has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at a calibrated speed at light throttle. It engages at
higher speeds under heavier acceleration. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during
normal operation in high gear. When the vehicle speed
drops below a calibrated speed, or during acceleration,
the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages. The
feature is operational in Overdrive and in Drive.

STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1-3 miles (1.6 - 4.8 km) of driving]. Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
Manually shifting (using the ERS shift control) between 4
(direct gear) and 5/D (Overdrive gear) positions will
demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and
out of Overdrive.
NOTE: If the vehicle has not been driven in several
days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the
transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to
the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into
any other gear position.

261

Rocking the Vehicle
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the gear
selector rhythmically between D (Drive) and R (Reverse),
while applying slight pressure to the accelerator.
NOTE: The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) and
Traction Control (if equipped) should be turned OFF
before attempting to rock the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control System” in Section 3 of this manual.
The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine is most effective. Racing the engine or
spinning the wheels, due to the frustration of not freeing
the vehicle, may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
selector in N (Neutral) for at least one minute after every

262

STARTING AND OPERATING

five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

CAUTION!
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between
“First” and R (Reverse), do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Quadra-Trac I姞 Operating
Instructions/Precautions — If Equipped
The Quadra-Trac I威 is a single speed (HI range only)
transfer case which provides convenient full-time
4–wheel drive. No driver interaction is required. This
transfer case divides engine torque almost evenly with 48

percent of engine torque to the front axle and 52 percent
of engine torque to the rear axle. The Brake Traction
Control System (BTC), which combines standard ABS
and Traction Control, provides resistance to any wheel
that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer to
wheels with traction.
NOTE: The Quadra-Trac I威 system is not appropriate
for conditions where LOW range is recommended. Refer
to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in this section.
Quadra-Trac II姞 Operating
Instructions/Precautions — If Equipped
The Quadra-Trac II威 transfer case is fully automatic in the
normal driving 4 HI mode. The Quadra-Trac II威 transfer
case provides three mode positions — four wheel drive
high range, neutral, and four wheel drive low range.
This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4 HI mode.
This transfer case divides engine torque almost evenly
with 48 percent of engine torque to the front axle and 52

STARTING AND OPERATING

263

percent of engine torque to the rear axle. When speed
differences are increased between the front and rear drive
shafts, the transfer case can transmit up to 100 percent of
available engine torque to the front or rear drive shafts.

Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
cause damage to the transfer case.

When additional traction is required, the 4 LOW position
can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together
and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. The 4 LOW position is intended for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Driving in the 4 LOW position on dry
hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
damage to driveline components.

Because four wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

When operating your vehicle in 4 LOW, the engine speed
is approximately three times that of the 4 HI position at a
given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine
and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

264

STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
4 HI
Four Wheel Drive High Range — All roads surfaces such
as ice, snow, gravel, sand, and dry hard pavement.

N (Neutral)
Neutral — Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in Section 5 of this manual.
4 LOW
Four Wheel Drive Low Range — Low speed 4 wheel
drive. Locks the front and rear driveshafts together.
Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling power
for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25
mph (40 km/h).
Shifting Procedures
4 HI to 4 LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h),
key ON or engine running, shift the transmission into N
(Neutral), and raise the transfer case T-handle. “The 4WD

STARTING AND OPERATING

265

LOW Indicator Lamp” in the instrument cluster will
begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift is
complete. Release the T-handle.
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a
transfer case motor temperature protection condition
exists, a “CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURES” message will
flash from the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. (See page 183 for
more information.)

5
Shifter T-Handle

4 LOW to 4 HI
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h),
key ON or engine running, shift the transmission into N
(Neutral), and raise the transfer case T-handle. The “4WD

266

STARTING AND OPERATING

LOW Indicator Lamp” in the instrument cluster will flash
and go out when the shift is complete. Release the
T-handle.
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a
transfer case motor temperature protection condition
exists, a “CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURES” message will
flash from the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. (See page 183 for
more information.)
NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible
with the vehicle completely stopped, however difficulty
may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being
properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The
preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph (0
to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5
km/h), the transfer case will not allow the shift.

Neutral (N) Shift Procedure
1. Key ON, engine off.
2. Vehicle stopped, with foot on brake.
3. Place transmission in N (Neutral).
4. Hold down N (Neutral) “pin” switch (with a pen, etc.)
for 4 seconds until the LED lamp by the switch starts to
blink indicating shift in progress. Lamp will stop blinking
(stay on solid) when Neutral shift is complete. A “4WD
SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will display on the
EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. (See page 183 for more information.)

STARTING AND OPERATING

267

to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4 of this manual. (See page 183 for more
information.)

Neutral Switch

5. Repeat Steps 1– 4 to shift out of Neutral.
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a
“CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURES” message will flash from
the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer

Quadra-Drive II姞 System — If Equipped
The optional Quadra-Drive II威 System features three
torque transfer couplings. The couplings include ELSD
(Electronic Limited Slip Differential) front and rear axles
and Quadra-Trac II威 transfer case. The optional ELSD
axles are fully automatic and require no driver input to
operate. Under normal driving conditions the units function as standard axles balancing torque evenly between
left and right wheels. With a traction difference between
left and right wheels the coupling will sense a speed
difference. As one wheel begins to spin faster than the
other, torque will automatically transfer from the wheel
that has less traction to the wheel that has traction. While
the transfer case and axle couplings differ in design, their

268

STARTING AND OPERATING

operation is similar. Follow the Quadra-Trac II威 transfer
case shifting information, preceding this section, for
shifting this system.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles any more than lowslung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover.

OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
NOTE: Prior to off-road driving, remove the front air
dam to prevent damage. The front air dam is attached to
the lower front fascia with quarter turn fasteners, and can
be removed by hand.
When To Use 4WD LOW Range — If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
4WD LOW range.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water:

STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph (8
km/h). Always check water depth before entering as
a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving
through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches deep will
require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through water, try
to determine the depth and the bottom condition (and
location of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed with
caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than
5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes

269

and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches. The
flowing water can erode the streambed causing your
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches,
and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches of water is less than 5
mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contaminated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance)
should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent component damage.

270

STARTING AND OPERATING

Driving In Snow, Mud and Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section.
Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain
headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels
and traction will be lost.

If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine and
shift to R (Reverse). Back slowly down the hill allowing
the compression braking of the engine to help regulate
your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle
speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding
the tires.

Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.

WARNING!

Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use
first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.

If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight down a hill in R (Reverse) gear. Never
back down a hill in N (Neutral) using only the brake.

STARTING AND OPERATING

Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill-always
drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by
turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a fresh
“bite” into the surface and will usually provide traction
to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer
case to 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly down
the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission whenever possible.

271

After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.

272

STARTING AND OPERATING

• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have brake rotors, wheels,
brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as
soon as possible.

WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You
might not have full braking power when you need it
to prevent an accident. If you have been operating
your vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes
checked and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.

PARKING BRAKE
To set the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will light. To release the parking brake, pull
up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
NOTE: The instrument cluster “Brake Warning Light”
indicates only that the parking brake is applied. It does
not indicate the degree of brake application.

STARTING AND OPERATING

273

WARNING!

Parking Brake

Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and
the gear shift lever is in the P (Park) position. When
parking on a hill, you should apply the parking brake
before placing the gear shift lever in P (Park), otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the selector out of P (Park).

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in P (Park). Failure to do so may allow the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
• Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake or the gear selector
lever. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake
problems due to excessive heating of the rear
brakes.

274

STARTING AND OPERATING

When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.

WARNING!
Significant over or under inflation of tires, or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.
The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low-speed selftest at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your foot
lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may
feel slight pedal movement. The movement can be more
apparent on ice and snow. This is normal.
The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runs during
the self-test at 12 mph (20 km/h) and during an ABS stop.
The pump motor makes a low humming noise during
operation, which is normal.

STARTING AND OPERATING

275

WARNING!

Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.

• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.

276

STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possible
detrimental effects of electronic interference caused
by improperly installed after-market radios or telephones.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing
sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard.
This is normal, indicating that the Anti-Lock Brake
System is functioning.

WARNING!
To use your brakes and accelerator more safely,
follow these tips:

• Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the
pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in
unpredictable braking action, longer stopping distances, or brake damage.
• When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control.
Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the
transmission or locking out overdrive whenever possible.
• Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm-up,
which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in
loss of vehicle control. Be especially careful while
driving on slippery roads, in close-quarter maneuvering, parking or stopping.
• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially
when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can

STARTING AND OPERATING

277

build up between the tire tread and the road. This
hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, braking
ability, and control.

NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.

• After going through deep water or a car wash, brakes
may become wet, resulting in decreased performance
and unpredictable braking action. Dry the brakes by
gentle, intermittent pedal action while driving at very
slow speeds.

Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and does not in any
way damage the steering system.

POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.

5
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

278

STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the
end of the steering wheel travel will increase the
steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided
when possible. Damage to the power steering pump
may occur.
MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS) - 5.7L
Engine Only
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return
to full functionality after a battery disconnect.

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings

NOTE:
• P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

STARTING AND OPERATING

279

• European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H

• Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

• LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

• High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

280

STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—⬙R⬙ means Radial Construction.
—⬙D⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)

STARTING AND OPERATING

281

EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.

282

STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
of the tire.

EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.

STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Loading and Tire Pressure

283

Tire and Loading Information Placard

Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.

5
Tire and Loading Information

Tire Placard Location

This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.

284

STARTING AND OPERATING

Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.

combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)

STARTING AND OPERATING

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations

285

and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
Kg).

286

STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.

287

1. Safety—

WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
accidents.

• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in
tire failure.

• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause damage that
results in tire failure.

Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You
could lose control of your vehicle.

• Overinflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.

• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the
other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire properly inflated.

288

STARTING AND OPERATING

2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.

Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either
the face of the driver’s door, or the driver’s side “B” pillar.

3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.

Tire Placard Location

The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to

STARTING AND OPERATING

289

check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.

CAUTION!

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in
the winter.

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall.

Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

290

STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious accident.
Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial-Ply Tires

WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial tires in sets of four. Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
dealer for radial tire repairs.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).

STARTING AND OPERATING

291

WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and do
not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what
the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.

5
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear
in 2 or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.

292

STARTING AND OPERATING

Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:

Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.

• Driving style

Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire. The
service description and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability.

• Tire pressure
• Distance driven

WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death.

STARTING AND OPERATING

293

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have an accident
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have an accident.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.

Alignment and Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
• Fast tire wear.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
• Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull left or right.
Alignment will not correct this problem. See your authorized dealer for proper diagnosis.

294

STARTING AND OPERATING

Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.

• Install chains snugly and tighten after 1/2 mile (1 km)
of driving.

TIRE CHAINS
Certain models have sufficient tire-to-body clearance to
allow use of tire chains. Install chains on rear tires only.
Follow these recommendations to guard against damage
and excessive tire and chain wear:

• Drive cautiously, avoiding large bumps, potholes and
extreme driving maneuvers.

• Do not install tire chains or traction devices on vehicles with larger than P235/65R17 size tires. Tires
larger than this may not provide sufficient body
clearance with chains or other traction devices.
• Use SAE class “S” tire chains or traction devices only.
• Follow tire chain manufacturer’s instructions for
mounting chains.

• Do not exceed 35 mph (56 km/h), unless otherwise
specified by the chain manufacturer.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and develop irregular wear patterns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.

STARTING AND OPERATING

295

Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE: The Premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.

The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (–11°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will

296

STARTING AND OPERATING

decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
3 hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer to
the “Tires – General Information” in this section for
information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment
for this increased pressure.
The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure
warning threshold for any reason, including low temperature effects.
The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be

increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order
for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to be
turned off. The system will automatically update and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish
once the updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than 3 hours) tire pressure of 33 psi (227
kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be ON. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring

STARTING AND OPERATING

Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires have been
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
value.
NOTE: Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPM system will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
Base System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:

297

• Receiver Module
• 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full size
spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
tires.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low. The audible
chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each
condition that it detects. Should this occur, you should
stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of
each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure. The system

298

STARTING AND OPERATING

will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Light” will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information. A low spare tire will not cause
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate or the chime to sound.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 60 seconds, and an audible chime will
sound when a system fault is detected. The flash cycle
will repeat every ten minutes, without an audible chime,
until the fault condition no longer exists. If the ignition
key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
system fault still exists.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full
size spare tire, it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor,
and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS). In the event that the matching full size

spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire, the
next ignition key cycle will still show the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to be ON, and a chime to
sound. Driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15
mph (24 km/h) will turn OFF the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” as long as the spare tire or any other
road tire(s) are not below the low pressure warning
threshold.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a non-matching
full size spare tire, it does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, it will not be monitored by
the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). In the event
that the non-matching full size spare tire is swapped with
a low pressure road tire, each ignition key cycle will still
show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to be
ON, and a chime to sound. After the original road tire has
been properly repaired, and put back onto the vehicle in
place of the non-matching full size spare tire, the TPMS

STARTING AND OPERATING

will update automatically, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will be OFF as long as none of the
road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.

CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
not use tire sealant from a can, or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to
the sensors may result.

299

CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

300

STARTING AND OPERATING

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
• Receiver Module
• 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• 3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheel
wells)
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full size
spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
tires.

STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low. The audible
chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each
condition that it detects. In addition, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display one or
more Low Pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, Right
Front, Right Rear) for 3 seconds, and a graphic display of
the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4 of this manual.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full
size spare tire, a low matching full size spare tire will set
the “SPARE LOW PRESSURE” text message, but it will
not cause the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to
illuminate or the chime to sound.

301

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a non-matching
full size spare tire, a low non-matching full size spare tire
will not display any text messages, or cause the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate or the
chime to sound.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.

302

STARTING AND OPERATING

Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure.
The system will automatically update, the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish
once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Service Tire Pressure System
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 60 seconds, and an audible chime will
sound when a system fault is detected. The flash cycle
will repeat every ten minutes, without an audible chime,
until the fault condition no longer exists.
The EVIC will display the “SERVICE TIRE PRESS. SYSTEM” message for 3 seconds. This text message is then

followed by a graphic, with “- -“ displayed for the
pressure value(s) indicating which of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.

STARTING AND OPERATING

If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TIRE PRESS.
SYSTEM⬙ text message will no longer display, and a
pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full
size spare tire, it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor,
and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS). In the event that the matching full size
spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire, the
next ignition key cycle will still show the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to be ON, a chime to sound, a
Low Pressure message to appear in the EVIC, and the
graphic display will still show the low tire pressure value
flashing. Driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) will turn OFF the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” as long as the matching full
size spare tire or any other road tire(s) are not below the

303

low pressure warning threshold. The EVIC will display a
“Spare Low Pressure” text message, and the graphic
display will show a new tire pressure value in place of
the flashing low tire pressure value.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a non-matching
full size spare tire, it does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, it will not be monitored by
the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). In the event
that the non-matching full size spare tire is swapped with
a low pressure road tire, every ignition key cycle will still
show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to be
ON, a chime to sound, a Low Pressure message to appear
in the EVIC, and the graphic display will still show the
low tire pressure value flashing. After the original road
tire has been properly repaired and put back onto the
vehicle in place of the non-matching full size spare tire,
the TPMS will update the graphic display on the EVIC
with a new tire pressure value instead of the flashing low
tire pressure value, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring

304

STARTING AND OPERATING

Telltale Light” will be OFF as long as no road tire(s) are
below the low pressure warning threshold. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.

CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, nor to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

STARTING AND OPERATING

305

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.

The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”

United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123

General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.7/4.7L Engines (If Equipped)
All engines (except 5.7L engines) are designed to meet all emissions regulations
and provide excellent fuel economy and
performance when using high quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use of premium
gasoline is not recommended. Under normal conditions,
the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit
over high quality regular gasolines, and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance.

306

STARTING AND OPERATING

5.7L Engines (If Equipped)
The 5.7L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane
for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline
is not recommended. Under normal conditions, the use of
premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high
quality regular and mid-grade gasolines, and in some
circumstances may result in poorer performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturer’s world wide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

STARTING AND OPERATING

The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.

CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.

307

Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
or not his/her gasoline contains MMT.

308

STARTING AND OPERATING

It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.

• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system.

MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.

• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.

Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:

• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.

STARTING AND OPERATING

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:

309

the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (4.7L ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED

• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time

E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by the
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline only powered vehicles.

310

STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.

WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.

Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
these two.
For best results, a refueling pattern that alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided.
When you do switch fuels, it is recommended that
• you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
than 1/4 full
• you do not add less than 5 gallons when refueling
• you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
a period of at least 5 minutes
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in drivability
during warm up.

STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: When the ambient temperature is above 90°F
(32°C), you may experience hard starting and rough idle
following start up even if the above recommendations are
followed.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) and Gasoline Vehicles
Whether operating the vehicle on an E-85 ethanol fuel or
unleaded gasoline the engine oil requirements are the
same. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of
this manual for the proper quality and viscosity engine
oil.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in drivability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.

311

Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than
gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon (mpg)
and your driving range to decrease by about 30% compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.

CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.

312

STARTING AND OPERATING

Maintenance
If you operate the vehicle using E-85 fuel, follow “Maintenance Schedule B.” Refer to Section 8 of this manual.

CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — DIESEL
Diesel fuels are available from most reputable fuel marketers. We encourage you to use only the best quality fuel
with a calculated Cetane Index of 50 or higher. In
addition, the manufacturer recommends using diesel fuel
with a sulfur content of less than 15 ppm. See your
authorized dealer or distributor for further information
regarding fuels available in your area.

In areas where diesel fuel is below the recommended
quality levels (high levels of sulfur and water) it is critical
to monitor the fuel filter for contamination and the
“Water-In-Fuel” message in the EVIC (Refer to Section 4).
Failure to properly service the fuel system for these items
can significantly reduce engine life and lead to major
engine repair. More frequent service intervals of the fuel
filter/water separator unit may be required under these
conditions than those shown in “Maintenance Schedule
A or B.” See your authorized dealer or distributor for
specific information.

STARTING AND OPERATING

313

ADDING FUEL

CAUTION!
DO NOT put gasoline in your diesel vehicle (if
equipped). If you accidentally put gasoline in your
vehicle, DO NOT start the engine. This will cause
damage to the fuel system. Have the fuel system
flushed.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the
driver’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.

5
Fuel Filler Cap Location

314

STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel cap
(gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Light) to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping
from the system.

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.

CAUTION!
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.

NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.

WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This
is in violation of most state and federal fire
regulations and will cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on.

STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly
tightened.
If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the Malfunction
Indicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.

WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the

315

EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4 of
this manual. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking”
sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler
cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System — OBDII” in Section 7 of this manual for more
information.

CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system.

316

STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
• Never add fuel when the engine is running.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or the
tank filled.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and

Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, trailer
tongue weight, and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR).
Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear
GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.

STARTING AND OPERATING

Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Label represents the actual tire size on
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.

317

Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front

318

STARTING AND OPERATING

or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.

TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.

Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.

To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

CAUTION!

Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Also overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.

STARTING AND OPERATING

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include
a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a driver).
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.

319

WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue

320

STARTING AND OPERATING

that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing

safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.

WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in an accident.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.

STARTING AND OPERATING

321

5
Weight Distributing Hitch System

Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System

322

STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) with the
optional Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your dealer for
package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.

Trailer Hitch Classification
Class
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Heavy Duty
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING

323

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission
3.7L/Automatic

Model
4x2

GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
8,000 lbs (3 629 kg)

3.7L/Automatic

4x4

8,200 lbs (3 719 kg)

4.7L/Automatic

4x2

8.560 lbs (3 883 kg)

4.7L/Automatic

4x4

8,650 lbs (3 924 kg)

4.7L/Automatic
(w/Trailer Tow
Group IV)
4.7L/Automatic
(w/Trailer Tow
Group IV)

4x2

11,200 lbs (5 080 kg)

4x4

11,450 lbs (5 194 kg)

Frontal Area
35 Sq. Ft. (3.25
square meters)
35 Sq. Ft. (3.25
square meters)
35 Sq. Ft. (3.25
square meters)
35 Sq. Ft. (3.25
square meters)
64 Sq. Ft. (5.95
square meters)
64 Sq. Ft. (5.95
square meters)

Max. GTW (Gross
Max. Tongue
Trailer Wt.)
Wt. (See Note 1)
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) 350 lbs (159 kg)
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)

350 lbs (159 kg)

3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)

350 lbs (159 kg)

3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)

350 lbs (159 kg)

6,500 lbs (2 948 kg)

650 lbs (295 kg)

6,500 lbs (2 948 kg)

650 lbs (295 kg)

324

STARTING AND OPERATING

5.7L/Automatic
5.7L/Automatic
(Overland)
5.7L/Automatic
3.0L Diesel/
Automatic

4x2

12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)

64 Sq. Ft. (5.95 7,400 lbs (3
square meters)
4x2
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg) 64 Sq. Ft. (5.95 7,395 lbs (3
square meters)
4x4
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg) 64 Sq. Ft. (5.95 7,200 lbs (3
square meters)
4x4
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg) 64 Sq. Ft. (5.95 7,200 lbs (3
square meters)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. The addition of passengers and cargo may require reducing tongue load and

357 kg)

740 lbs (336 kg)

354 kg)

740 lbs (336 kg)

266 kg)

720 lbs (327 kg)

266 kg)

720 lbs (327 kg)

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the
trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of 3,200 lbs (1 451 kg). Refer
to “Weight Distributing Hitch” in this section. Refer to
the Tire–Safety Information section in this manual.

STARTING AND OPERATING

325

Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

326

STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual
for the maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components the following guidelines are recommended:

CAUTION!
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 km)
of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your
vehicle.

• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer towing,
limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).

Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.

WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a

STARTING AND OPERATING

loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
P (Park). For four-wheel-drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in neutral. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙
the trailer wheels.

327

• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).

328

STARTING AND OPERATING

Towing Requirements — Tires
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
− Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
− When replacing tires, refer to the Tires–General Information section of this manual on Replacement Tires for

proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).

STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded,
it should have its own brakes and they should be of
adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and
cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you
need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance.
When towing you should allow for additional space
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.

329

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.

330

STARTING AND OPERATING

4 - Pin Connector

7- Pin Connector

Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.

STARTING AND OPERATING

Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the ”Tow/
Haul” mode (if equipped) or a lower gear range should
be selected.
NOTE: Using the ”Tow/Haul” mode (if equipped) or a
lower gear range while operating the vehicle under
heavy operating conditions will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule B” in Section 8 of this manual for
transmission fluid change intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.

331

Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
− Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
− City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in neutral and increase engine idle speed.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.

332

STARTING AND OPERATING

− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.

Towing — Quadra-Trac I (Single-Speed Transfer
Case) 4WD Models

− Refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more information.

Recreational towing is not allowed. This model does not
have a N (Neutral) position in the transfer case.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing – 2WD Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft
is removed. Towing with the rear wheels on the ground
while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe
transmission damage.

Towing — Quadra–Trac II /Quadra–Drive II 4WD
Models

CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
recreational towing.
NOTE: The transfer case must be in the N (Neutral)
position, and the transmission must be in the P (Park)
position for recreational towing.

STARTING AND OPERATING

Shifting Into Neutral (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.

CAUTION!

indicating shift in progress. Lamp will stop blinking (stay
on solid) when Neutral shift is complete. A “4WD SYSTEM
IN NEUTRAL” message will display on the EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this
manual. (See page 183 for more information.)

It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.

1. Depress brake pedal.
2. Turn the ignition key ON, engine off.
3. Shift transmission into N (Neutral).
4. Shift transfer case into N (Neutral).
Hold down N (Neutral) “pin” switch (with a pen, etc.) for
4 seconds until the LED lamp by the switch starts to blink

333

Neutral Switch

334

STARTING AND OPERATING

5. Start engine.
6. Shift transmission into D (Drive).
7. Release brake pedal and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
8. Shut the engine off.
9. Shift transmission into P (Park).
10. Place the ignition key in the OFF position, and
remove key.
11. Apply parking brake.
12. Attach vehicle to the tow vehicle with tow bar.
13. Release parking brake.

CAUTION!
Transmission damage may occur if the transmission
is shifted into P (Park) with the transfer case in N
(Neutral) and the engine running. With the transfer
case in N (Neutral) ensure that the engine is OFF
prior to shifting the transmission into P (Park) (refer
to steps 7 – 8 above).
Shifting Out Of Neutral (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Depress brake pedal.
2. Turn the ignition key ON, engine off.
3. Shift transmission into N (Neutral).
4. Shift transfer case out of N (Neutral).

STARTING AND OPERATING

Hold down N (Neutral) “pin” switch (with a pen, etc.) for
4 seconds until the LED lamp by the switch starts to blink
indicating shift in progress. Lamp will stop blinking (go
out) when shift is complete. The “4WD SYSTEM IN
NEUTRAL” message will no longer be displayed on the
EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual. (See page 183 for more information.)

335

5
Neutral Switch

5. Shift transmission into P (Park).
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift transmission into D (Drive).

336

STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case N (Neutral),
turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear
clash.

CAUTION!
Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.

SNOW PLOW
Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision.

WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle. This
could adversely affect the functioning of the airbag
system and you could be injured.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

䡵 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 349

▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

▫ 2WD Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

▫ 4WD Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

338

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Your vehicle’s hazard warning flasher is an emergency
warning system. When you activate it, all front and rear
directional signals will flash intermittently. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled on or near the road. It warns other drivers
to steer clear of you and your vehicle. This is an emergency
warning system, not to be used when the vehicle is in motion.

To activate the warning flasher, push down on the button
on top of the steering column until it latches. To turn the
warning flasher off, push down again to unlatch the
button.
NOTE: With extended use, the flasher may run down
your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — Slow down.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transmission in N
(Neutral), but do not increase engine idle speed.

Hazard Warning Switch

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
Control to maximum heat, the Mode Control to floor, and
the Fan Control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”,
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H”, and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately, and call for service.

339

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!
• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.

340

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
in the passenger side compartment behind the second
row seat.

Spare Tire Stowage
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under a plastic cover at the
center-rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the liftgate
opening.

CAUTION!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact type tools can damage the winch mechanism.

Jack Storage Location

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

341

Spare Tire Removal
Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use the
Lug Wrench to rotate the nut counter clockwise until the
spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to
allow to pull the tire out from under the vehicle.

CAUTION!

Lowering/Raising Spare Tire

The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and can
damage the winch.
When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable and pull it through the center of the wheel.

342

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Preparations For Jacking
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in P (Park). Turn OFF the ignition.

WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
• Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position.

For example, if changing the right front tire, block the
left rear wheel.
• Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools as shown. Connect
jack handle driver (A) to two extensions (B), then to the
lug wrench (C).

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

343

4. Locate the jack as shown. For the front axle, place it
under the front lower control arm as shown. For the rear
axle, place it under the axle near the wheel to be changed.
Ensure the jack is closest to the inside of the wheel when
jacking on the rear axle. Do not raise the vehicle until
you are sure the jack is fully engaged.

Front Jacking Location

344

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.

Rear Jacking Location

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.

7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the
vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter
clockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Correct
wheel nut tightness is 130 N·m (95 ft. lbs). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
10. Lower the jack to it’s fully closed position.

WARNING!
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their proper locations.

345

NOTE: Tire should be stowed with the “beauty” side
up. Storing the tire upside down may result in scratching
or damage to the wheel face. Continue winching up the
tire until you hear the winch “ratchet” three times.
Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the
underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch cable
may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire loose.

WARNING!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact type tools may damage the winch mechanism.
12. Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the cargo
area.

346

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

JUMP STARTING
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may
be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the
battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly, so follow this procedure
carefully.

WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing.
Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or
allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes
in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes.
Do not use a booster battery or any other booster
source that has a greater than 12 volt system, i.e. Do
not use a 24 volt power source.
1. Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets which might make an unintended electrical
contact.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles, place the transmission in P (Park), and turn
the ignition OFF.
3. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged
battery.

WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.

347

1. Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets which might make an unintended electrical
contact.
2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles, place the transmission in P (Park), and turn
the ignition OFF.
3. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged
battery.

348

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.

Any procedure other than above could result in:
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting
out the battery vent;
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;

5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
a good contact on the engine.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.

3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!
• You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing.
• Do not connect the cable to the negative post of
the discharge battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode.
• During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought up above
freezing point before attempting jump start.

349

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.

CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.

350

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps and chains may break, causing
serious injury.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
2WD Models Only
Provided the transmission is operable, tow only in N
(Neutral) at speeds not exceeding 30 mph (48 km/h), for
distances of not more than 15 miles (24 km). Towing at
more than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 15 miles
(24 km) can cause severe transmission damage. If the
transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km), remove the driveshaft or tow with all four
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow

the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle
raised and the other end on a towing dolly.
4WD Models Only
The manufacturer recommends towing with all four
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle
raised and the other end on a towing dolly.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment – 3.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

䡵 Engine Compartment – 4.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

䡵 Engine Compartment – 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

䡵 Engine Compartment – 3.0L Diesel . . . . . . . . . . 357

▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension . . 366

䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . . 358

▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

▫ Spark Plug Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . 369

352

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
▫ Windshield Washers — Front And Rear . . . . . 374
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

䡵 Fuse Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
▫ Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution
Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

▫ Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power
Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 381

䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

▫ Fuel System Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

▫ Head Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

353

▫ Front Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 408

▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And
Back-Up Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

▫ Center High Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) . . . 406

▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

354

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 3.7L

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

355

ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 4.7L

356

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 5.7L

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

357

ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 3.0L DIESEL

358

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.

CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
• If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged. A “CHECK GASCAP” message
will be displayed in the EVIC (Refer to Section 4 of this

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

manual). Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is
heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened.
This message may be temporarily overridden by pressing
either the C/T, STEP, or MENU buttons. However, after
one minute of no customer interaction, the EVIC will
display again the “CHECK GASCAP” message. The
message will remain displayed until the vehicle diagnostic system can retest the fuel system. The test will
perform the next time the vehicle is started, if the vehicle
was keyed off above 40°F (4°C) outside temperature and
the following vehicle start is above 40°F (4°C) outside
temperature. It may be possible to have a message that
will not clear due to the test being disabled due to low
outside temperatures. If the test is performed and the
problem is gone, the message will disappear.
If the problem persists, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged

359

cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off. See
your authorized dealer for service.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery

360

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:

a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the
ignition key or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.

361

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.

WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.

362

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.

check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine
after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the SAFE level range. Adding 1 U.S. Quart
(0.95L) of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE
range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE
range.

CAUTION!

Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to

Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Change Engine Oil
Road conditions as well as your kind of driving affect the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following to determine if any apply to you:
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C)
• Stop and go driving
• Extensive engine idling
• Driving in dusty conditions
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C)
• Trailer towing
• Taxi, Police, or delivery service (Commercial Service)
• Off road or desert operation

363

• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
If ANY of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months, whichever
comes first, and follow the maintenance recommendations in “Maintenance Schedule B.”
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
every 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months, whichever
comes first.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Selection — Gasoline Engines
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler

364

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Material Standard MS-6395. Use Mopar威 or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Engine Oil Selection - Diesel Engines
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler
Material Standard MS-11106 or Mercedes Benz MB 229.51
and ACEA C3 qualified engine oils

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils that
meet
the
requirements
of
DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Use Mopar威 or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Engine Oil Viscosity (3.7L/4.7L/5.7L Engines)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil
filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil
viscosity for your vehicle.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

For information on engine oil filler cap location, see the
Engine Compartment illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (3.0L Diesel Engine)

CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced technology Diesel Engine and an emission device designed
to limit Diesel Particulate Emissions from being
released into the atmosphere. The durability of your
engine and life expectancy of this diesel particulate
filter emission device is highly dependent on the use
of the correct engine oil.

365

In order to protect your engine and emission system, use
only SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Engine Oil that meets Chrysler
Material Standard MS-11106 or Mercedes Benz MB 229.51
and ACEA C3 qualified engine oils.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and it’s
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,

366

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your local authorized dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice on how
and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded
in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar威 engine oil filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.

Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension
Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic
tensioner. No belt tension adjustments are required.
However, belt and belt tensioner condition should be
inspected at the specified intervals, and replaced if required. See your authorized dealer for service.
At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, all
belts and tensioner should be checked for condition.
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.
Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks,
glazing, or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication
of damage which could result in belt failure. Low generator belt tension can cause battery failure.
Also, check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance and emission control. New spark plugs should be
installed at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug. Refer to the “Vehicle Emission Control Information” label in the engine compartment for spark plug
information.
Spark Plug Wires
The spark plug wires should be kept clean and properly
connected. Terminals should be fully seated. Cracked,
damaged, or faulty wires should be replaced.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at
the intervals shown on “Maintenance Schedule A.” If,
however, you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or

367

severe conditions, the filter element should be inspected
periodically and replaced if necessary at the intervals
shown on “Maintenance Schedule B.”

WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.

368

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
converter as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.

CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

369

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Crankcase Emission Control System
Proper operation of this system depends on freedom
from sticking or plugging due to deposits. As vehicle
mileage builds up, the PCV valve and passages may
accumulate deposits. If a valve is not working properly,
replace it with a new valve. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE!

370

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or
plugging deposits. Replace if necessary.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

371

CAUTION!

To determine the battery charge, check the battery test
indicator (if equipped) on top of the battery. Refer to the
illustration.

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked (+)
positive and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case.
• If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

7
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include

372

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt condition should also be checked at this time.

WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for
additional warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.

Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
Power Steering Fluid Check
The power steering system requires the use of Mopar威
Hydraulic System Power Steering Fluid (P/N
05142893AA),
or
equivalent,
which
meets
DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-10838.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

373

CAUTION!

WARNING!

Do not use Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) or
other types of power steering fluids when servicing
the power steering system of this vehicle. Damage to
the power steering system can result from the use of
the wrong power steering fluid.

Fluid level should be checked on a level surface with
the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts,
and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
overfill. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended
fluid.

Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
“DaimlerChrysler Dealership.”

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
NOTE: Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power
steering pump may make noise for a short period of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system.
This noise should be considered normal, and does not in
any way damage the steering system.

374

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, tailgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper Blades
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner to remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to wipe frost or ice from the
windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Windshield Washers — Front and Rear
On vehicles equipped with a Vehicle Information Center,
the low washer fluid level will be indicated. When the
sensor detects a low fluid level, the windshield will light
on the vehicle graphic outline and the “Washer Fluid
Low” message will be displayed.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the front of
the engine compartment (on the driver side), and should
be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
antifreeze/coolant) and operate the system for a few
seconds to flush out the residual water.

WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.

375

Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

376

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this
manual.

Cooling System

WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot antifreeze/
coolant or steam from your radiator. If you see or
hear steam coming from under the hood, don’t open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check antifreeze/coolant protection every 12 months
(before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable).
If antifreeze/coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
antifreeze/coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the antifreeze/coolant will begin to drain from
the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.

377

Cooling System — Drain, Flush, And Refill
At the intervals shown in the appropriate “Maintenance
Schedule,” the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled.
If the solution is dirty and contains a considerable
amount of sediment, clean and flush with reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze/coolant solution.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended antifreeze/
coolant, refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for
correct antifreeze/coolant type.

378

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
Mixing of antifreeze/coolant other than the specified
HOAT antifreeze/coolant may result in decreased
corrosion protection and engine damage. If a nonHOAT antifreeze/coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it should be replaced
with the specified antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base
antifreeze/coolant products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the antifreeze/coolant and may
plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based antifreeze/coolant. Use of
Propylene Glycol base antifreeze/coolant is not recommended.

Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved antifreeze/
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
antifreeze/coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000
miles before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same antifreeze/coolant throughout the life of your
vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT)
antifreeze/coolant.
When adding antifreeze/coolant, a minimum solution of
50% recommended Mopar威 Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use
higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures
below -34°F (-37°C) are anticipated.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/antifreeze (coolant) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the
amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing antifreeze/coolant types will decrease
the life of the antifreeze/coolant and will require more
frequent antifreeze/coolant changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
antifreeze/coolant, and to insure that antifreeze/coolant
will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank.

379

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!
• The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add antifreeze/coolant when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.

380

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based antifreeze/coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals and
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based antifreeze/
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child, contact a
physician immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the antifreeze/coolant level is adequate.
With the engine idling, and warm to normal operating
temperature, the level of the antifreeze/coolant in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the
bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
not need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
antifreeze/coolant freeze point or replacing antifreeze/
coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as
the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the
coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional antifreeze/coolant is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot antifreeze/
coolant to enter the radiator.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check antifreeze/coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze/
coolant needs to be added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent antifreeze/coolant additions are required,
or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not
drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should
be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain antifreeze/coolant concentration at 50%
HOAT antifreeze/coolant (minimum) and distilled
water for proper corrosion protection of your engine
which contains aluminum components.

381

• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Hoses and Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.

382

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or
moving component that may cause heat damage or
mechanical wear.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed. Inspect all hose connections such as clamps
and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks
are present. Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of degradation that could
cause failure.
Fuel System Connections
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
designed with tubes and special connects, connections
and clamps which have unique material characteristics to
provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline.

You are urged to use only the manufactures-specified
tubes, connections and clamps, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the appropriate “Maintenance Schedule” in
Section 8 for suggested service intervals.

WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

383

Brake and Power Steering System Hoses
When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses for evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears,
cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention should be made to
examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat
sources, such as the exhaust manifold.

NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be performed
whenever the brake system is serviced and every engine
oil change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots. If there is any evidence
of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be
replaced immediately! Eventual deterioration of the hose
can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure.

Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
are secure and no leaks are present.

WARNING!

NOTE: Often fluids such as oil, power steering fluid,
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot
fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle
operation) should be noted before hose is replaced based
on leakage.

Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.

384

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Brake Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic
reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a
“MAX” dot and an “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be
kept within these two dots. Do not add fluid above the
MAX mark, because leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the
correct fluid type.

WARNING!
Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point, or is unidentified as to specification,
may result in sudden brake failure during hard
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.

WARNING!
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
Do not allow a petroleum-base fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be to the bottom of the oil fill hole.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be 1/2” (1 cm) below the oil fill hole.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level
specified above.
Selection of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid, refer to
Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.

385

Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is
found, the transfer case fluid level can be checked by
removing the filler plug located on the back side of the
transfer case. The fluid level should be at the bottom edge
of the filler plug hole when the vehicle is in a level
position.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole until it runs out of the hole
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recommended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is
15–25 ft. lbs (20–34 N·m).

386

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.

Selection of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid, refer to
Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
Automatic Transmission
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmission fluid, refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type. It is important that the transmission
fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the
recommended fluid.

Fluid Level Check
NOTE: If equipped with a dipstick, use the following
procedure. If your vehicle has a capped dipstick tube, it
is sealed and should not be tampered with. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid
level is set properly.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature. This occurs after at least 15 miles
(25 km) of driving. At normal operating temperature the
fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips.
To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,
the following procedure must be used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
position ending with the lever in P (Park).
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.

387

6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. The fluid level is only valid if there is a
solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick. If
the fluid is low, add as required into the dipstick tube. Do
not overfill. After adding any quantity of oil through the
oil fill tube, wait a minimum of two (2) minutes for the oil
to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the
fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 70°F (21°C) (room temperature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
normal operating temperature.

388

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
(10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading.
7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube.

Special Additives
The manufacturer recommends against the addition of
any additives to the transmission. Exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks.
Maintenance After Off-Road Driving
After extended operation in mud, sand or water, or
similar dirty conditions, have your brake discs, brake
linings, and axle joints inspected and cleaned as soon as
possible. This will prevent any abrasive material from
causing excessive wear or unpredictable braking action.
After driving off-road, completely inspect the underbody
of your vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension and exhaust system for damage. Check
threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the
chassis, drivetrain components, steering and suspension.
Retighten, if required, to torque values specified in the

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Service Manual. Also check for accumulations of vegetation or brush that could become a fire hazard, or conceal
damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.

CAUTION!
Under frequent heavy-duty driving conditions,
change all lubricants and lubricate body components, all driveline joints and steering linkage more
often than in normal service to prevent excessive
wear.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads

389

passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

390

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use Mopar威 Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains,
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.

CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and tailgate must be kept
clear and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar威 Touch Up Paint on scratches or chips as
soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up
paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove

391

heavy soil, use Mopar威 Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads,
steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar威 cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
finish.
Interior Care
Use Mopar威 Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with Mopar威 Total Clean, then
Mopar威 Spot & Stain Remover if absolutely necessary. Do
not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use Mopar威 Total
Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Leather Seat Care & Cleaning
Mopar威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.

392

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar威 Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.

393

Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar威 Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Dry with a soft tissue.
FUSE PANEL
Interior Fuses
The fuse panel is on the lower instrument panel just to
the left of the steering column.

394

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
3
4
5
6
7
8

Fuse Panel Location

Cavity
1
2

Cartridge
Fuse

Mini
Fuse
30 Amp
Green
15 Amp
Blue

Description
Audio Amp (B+)
Sunroof (B+)

Cartridge
Fuse

Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Spare (B+)
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow

Description
Htd Mirror (EBL)
Rr Pwr Out (B+)
Rr HVAC (R/O) (XK
Only)
Door Locks (B+)
Steer Col Lock (B+)
(ELV)
Pwr Outlet (B+)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
10

11
12

Cartridge
Fuse

Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red

Description
Final Drive Control
Module (FDCM),
Heater Ventilation,
Air Conditioning
(HVAC), Switch Bank,
Transfer Case Switch,
O/H, Heater Ventilation, Air Conditioning
(HVAC) Relay, Rear
Park Assist

Spare (B+)
10 Amp
Door Mods, Mem.
Red
Sw, O/H Lamps, IP
Courtesy Lamps,
Glove Box Lamp (B+)
10 Amp
Autowipe (R/A)
Red

Cavity
14
15
16

17
19
20

Cartridge
Fuse

Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red

15 Amp
Blue
Spare
(R/S)
10 Amp
Red

395

Description
Cigar Ltr (R/A)
Tire Pressure Transducers (R/O)
Steering Control
Module (SCM), Diag.
Connector, Cluster
(B+)
Flipper Glass (B+)

7
Sentry Key Remote
Entry Module
(SKREEM), Cluster
(R/S)

396

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
21

22
24

Cartridge
Fuse

Mini
Fuse
Spare
(Acc Delay)
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red

10 Amp
Red

Description

Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)

Rear Wiper (B+)
Power Distribution
Center (PDC) Relays,
Final Drive Control
Module (FDCM),
Front Control Module
(FCM) (R/S), A580
(R/S)
Shifter Assy (BTSI),
Trans. Case Switch,
ESP/ABS, Brake Supp
Rly Coil (R/S)

Power Distribution Center

Cavity
1

Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green

Mini
Fuse

Description
HVAC Blower

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
50 Amp
Red
50 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green

Mini
Fuse

Description

Cavity

Power Outlets

Rr Wiper/Ign R/O

ABS Pump

Cabin Htr 1 (Diesel
Only)
Auto Shut Down
(ASD)
Rr HVAC (XK Only)

Acc Delay/Seats

Pwr Liftgate (XK
Only)

Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
50 Amp
Red
50 Amp
Red

Mini
Fuse

397

Description
Starter/Junction Block
(JB) Power
Cig Ltr/T-Tow

25 Amp
Natural
Spare

Rear Window Defogger (EBL)/Htd Mirror
Junction Block (JB)
Power
Cabin Htr 2 (Diesel
Only)
Cabin Htr 3 (Diesel
Only)
Integrated Power
Module (IPM)/Coils

398

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Cartridge
Fuse

Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow

Description
EATX/AC Clutch

Cavity
26

Cartridge
Fuse

Mini
Fuse
15 Amp
Blue

Ign Sw
PCM Batt (Gasoline
Only)
ABS Valves
T-Tow (BUX)
Final Drive Control
Module (FDCM)
Fuel Pump
Final Drive Control
Module (FDCM)

27
28

15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural

Description
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) Auto
Shut Down (ASD)
(Diesel Only)
Brake/Stop Lamps
Next Generation Controller (NGC)/
Injectors

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module)

Cavity
9
10
12
13
14

Integrated Power Module

Cavity
8

Cartridge
Fuse

Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red

Description
Lt Park Lamps

15
16
17

Cartridge
Fuse

Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow

399

Description
Trailer-Tow Park
Lamps
Rt Park Lamps
Front Control Module
(FCM) Batt #4
Front Control Module
(FCM) Batt #2
Adjustable Pedal
Ft Fog Lamps
Horn
Rear Wiper

400

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity

Cartridge
Fuse

18
19
20
21
22

30 Amp
Pink

50 Amp
Red

27
28

Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow

15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow

Description
Front Control Module
(FCM) Batt #1
Lt Trailer-Tow Stop/
Turn
Front Control Module
(FCM) Batt #3
Rt Trailer-Tow Stop/
Turn
Final Drive Control
Module (FDCM)
MOD
Radiator Fan
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) #1
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) #2

Cavity
29
30

Cartridge
Fuse

Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red

Description
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) R/S
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
R/O

VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
• Remove fuse #27 in the Intelligent Power Module
labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD#1).
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Lights
Bulb Type
Glove Box Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Grab Handle Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . VT4976
Rear Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214–2
Visor Vanity Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V26377
Underpanel Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) . . . . . . . 103
Telltale/Hazard Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
* Available only from authorized dealers.

401

Exterior Lights
Bulb Type
Backup Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
Front Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
Front Park/Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2825
Headlights (Low Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
Headlights (High Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Rear License Plate Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Rear Stop/Tail Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
Rear Turn/Tail Lights (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that
can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.

402

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

2BULB REPLACEMENT
Head Light
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlamp cover.

4. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb.

CAUTION!

3. Turn the low or high beam bulb 1/4 turn counter
clockwise to remove from housing.

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Front Turn Signal
1. Open the hood.

403

3. Turn the turn signal bulb 1/4 turn counter clockwise
to remove from housing.

2. Remove the headlamp cover.

7
4. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.

404

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean
the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

Front Fog Light

Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, and Back-Up Lights

1. Reach behind the front fascia from under the vehicle.

1. Raise the liftgate.

2. Turn the front fog light bulb 1/4 turn counter clockwise to remove from housing.

2. Remove the two Torx fasteners.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

405

3. Squeeze the socket assembly tabs to remove it from the
housing.

7
4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
light assembly.

406

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Center High Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)
1. Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL.

2. Twist the bulb socket to remove from the CHMSL
housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket and reattach the
CHMSL.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

407

FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
3.7/4.7/5.7L Gasoline Engines
3.0L Diesel Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
3.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
4.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
3.0 Liter Diesel Engine (SAE 5W-30 Synthetic, API Certified)
Cooling System *
3.7 Liter Engine (Mopar威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
4.7 Liter Engine (Mopar威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
5.7 Liter Engine (Mopar威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
3.0 Liter Diesel Engine (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

U.S.

Metric

21 Gallons
22 Gallons

79 Liters
83 Liters

5 Qts
6 Qts
7 Qts
10 Qts
9 Qts
14.5 Qts
14.5 Qts
14 Qts

4.7
5.7
6.6
9.5

Liters
Liters
Liters
Liters

10 Liters
13.7 Liters
13.7 Liters
13.2 Liters

408

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant

Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology)
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-11106 or Mercedes Benz
MB 229.51 and ACEA C3 qualified engine oils.
Mopar威 Oil Filter (P/N 05281090)
Mopar威 Oil Filter (P/N 05175571AA)
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine
compartment.
87 Octane
87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Octane Recommended
Use only the best quality fuel with a calculated Cetane Index of 50 or
higher. In addition, the manufacturer recommends using diesel fuel with a
sulfur content of less than 350 ppm.

Engine Oil (3.7L/4.7L/5.7L Engines)
Engine Oil (3.0L Diesel Engines)
Oil Filter (3.7/4.7/5.7L Gasoline Engines)
Oil Filter (3.0L Diesel Engines)
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection (3.7L and 4.7L Engines)
Fuel Selection (5.7L Engines)
Fuel Selection (3.0L Diesel Engines)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

409

Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case (3.7L Engine Only)
Transfer Case
Axle Differential (Front-Rear)
Brake Master Cylinder

Power Steering Reservoir

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
Mopar威 NV 247/245 Transfer Case Lubricant
Mopar威 Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (API-GL5) or
equivalent with friction modifier additive.
Mopar威 DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
This system requires the use of Mopar威 Hydraulic System Power Steering
Fluid (P/N 05142893AA) or equivalent, which meets DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-10838.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 412

䡵 Maintenance Schedules — Diesel Engines . . . . . 433

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S

䡵 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

▫ Schedule “B” — Diesel Engines . . . . . . . . . . . 436 C

▫ Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

▫ Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 E

▫ Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

D
U
L
E
S

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E

412

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainS tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S

Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule ⴖBⴖ. It is for vehicles that are operated
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C)
• Stop and go driving
• Excessive engine idling
• Driving in dusty conditions
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C)
• Trailer towing
• Heavy loading

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service)
• Off-road or desert driving
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule “B.”
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you, change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow the maintenance recommendations in “Maintenance Schedule B.”
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then flush and
replace your engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow
“Schedule B” of the “Maintenance Schedules” section of
this manual.
Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Schedule “B.”

413 M

Use the schedule that best describes your driving conditions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.

CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E

S
C
H
E
At Each Stop for Fuel
D
• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully UL
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while E
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu- S

racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent, add as required.

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

414

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Once a Month

At Each Oil Change

• Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.

• Change the engine oil filter.

• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and transmission, and add as needed.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.

• Inspect the exhaust system.
• Inspect brake hoses.
• Check the engine coolant/anti-freeze level, hoses, and
clamps.
• After completion of off-road operation, the underside
of the vehicle should be thoroughly inspected. Examine threaded fasteners for looseness.

SCHEDULE “B”

Schedule “B”
Follow this schedule if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C)
• Stop and go driving
• Excessive engine idling
• Driving in dusty conditions
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C)
• Trailer towing
• Heavy loading

415 M

A
I
N
T
• Off-road or desert driving
E
• If equipped for and operated with E-85 (ethanol) N
A
fuel.
N
C
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you, change your E

• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service)

engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow the maintenance rec- S
C
ommendations in “Maintenance Schedule B.”
H
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then flush and
replace your engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow
“Schedule B” of the “Maintenance Schedules” section of
this manual.

E
D
U
L
E
S

M 416 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Rotate the tires.
E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

stowage.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Drain and refill the front and rear axles.
Inspect the brake linings.

3,000
(5 000)
X

6,000
(10 000)
X
X
X

9,000
(15 000)
X

12,000
(20 000)
X

15,000
(25 000)
X

X
X
X
X
X

SCHEDULE “B”

18,000
(30 000)
X
X
X

21,000
(35 000)
X

24,000
(40 000)
X
X
X

27,000
(45 000)
X

417 M

30,000
(50 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 418 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Rotate the tires.
E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

stowage.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Drain and refill the front and rear axles.
Inspect the brake linings.

33,000
(55 000)
X

36,000
(60 000)
X
X
X

39,000
(65 000)
X

42,000
(70 000)
X

45,000
(75 000)
X

X
X
X
X

SCHEDULE “B”

Miles
(Kilometers)
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not replaced at
3 months.
Rotate the tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Inspect the PCV Valve, replace if necessary.〫
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the engine accessory drive belt, replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain and refill the front and rear axles.
Drain and refill the automatic transmission fluid, and replace main sump filter and cooler return filter (if equipped)
(3.7L/4.7L/5.7L).
Drain and refill the transfer case fluid.
Flush and replace engine coolant/anti-freeze.

48,000
(80 000)
X
X
X

51,000
(85 000)
X

54,000
(90 000)
X
X
X

419 M

57,000
60,000
(95 000) (100 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 420 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Rotate the tires.
E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

stowage.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Inspect the engine accessory drive belt, replace if
necessary.*
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.

63,000
(105 000)
X

66,000
(110 000)
X
X
X

69,000
(115 000)
X

72,000
(120 000)
X

75,000
(125 000)
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

SCHEDULE “B”

Miles
(Kilometers)
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
Rotate the tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Inspect the PCV Valve, replace if necessary.〫
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the engine accessory drive belt, replace if
necessary.*
Drain and refill the transfer case fluid.
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.

78,000
(130 000)
X
X
X

81,000
(135 000)
X

84,000
(140 000)
X
X
X

87,000
(145 000)
X

421 M

90,000
(150 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 422 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Rotate the tires.
E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

93,000
(155 000)
X

96,000
(160 000)
X
X
X

99,000
(165 000)
X

102,000
(170 000)
X

105,000
(175 000)
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X

SCHEDULE “B”

423 M

Miles
108,000
111,000
114,000 117,000 120,000
(Kilometers)
(180 000) (185 000) (190 000) (195 000) (200 000)
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not replaced at
X
X
X
X
X
3 months.
Rotate the tires.
X
X
X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
X
X
X
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
X
Inspect the PCV Valve, replace if necessary.〫
X
Replace the spark plugs.
X
Inspect the engine accessory drive belt, replace if necessary.*
X
Inspect the brake linings.
X
X
Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
X
Drain and refill the automatic transmission fluid, and reX
place main sump filter and cooler return filter (if equipped)
(3.7L/4.7L/5.7L).
Drain and refill the transfer case fluid.
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze, if not reX
placed at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 424 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Rotate the tires.
E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

123,000
(205 000)
X
X
X

126,000
(210 000)
X

129,000
(215 000)
X

132,000
(220 000)
X

X
X

135,000
(225 000)
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

SCHEDULE “B”

Miles
(Kilometers)
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
Rotate the tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Inspect the PCV Valve, replace if necessary.〫
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the engine accessory drive belt, replace if
necessary.*
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
Drain and refill the transfer case fluid.
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze, if
not replaced at 120,000 miles (200 000 km).

138,000
(230 000)
X
X
X

141,000
(235 000)
X

144,000
(240 000)
X
X
X

147,000
(245 000)
X

425 M

150,000
(250 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

426

SCHEDULE “B”

Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
〫 This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner, but is not required to maintain
emissions warranty.

* This maintenance is not required if the belt was
previously replaced.

SCHEDULE “A”

427 M

Schedule “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if
necessary.
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain the transfer case and refill.

6,000
(10 000)
[6]
X
X
X

12,000
(20 000)
[12]
X
X
X

18,000
(30 000)
[18]
X
X
X

24,000
(40 000)
[24]
X
X
X

30,000
(50 000)
[30]
X
X
X
X
X

X
X

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 428 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Rotate the tires.
E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Inspect the brake linings.

36,000
(60 000)
[36]
X
X
X
X

42,000
(70 000)
[42]
X
X
X

48,000
(80 000)
[48]
X
X
X

54, 000
(90 000)
[54]
X
X
X
X

SCHEDULE “A”

Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the PCV Valve, replace if necessary.〫
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the engine accessory drive belt, replace if necessary.
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze.
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain the transfer case and refill.

60,000
(100 000)
[60]
X
X
X
X

66,000
(110 000)
[66]
X
X
X

72,000
(120 000)
[72]
X
X
X

78,000
(130 000)
[78]
X
X
X

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

X
X
X
X
X
X

429 M

M 430 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Rotate the tires.
E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the PCV Valve, replace if necessary.〫
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the engine accessory drive belt, replace if necessary.*
Inspect the brake linings.
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze if not
replaced at 60 months.
Drain the transfer case and refill.

84,000
(140 000)
[84]
X
X
X

90,000
(150 000)
[90]
X
X
X
X

96,000
(160 000)
[96]
X
X
X

102, 000
(170 000)
[102]
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

SCHEDULE “A”

Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the PCV Valve, replace if necessary.〫
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the engine accessory drive belt, replace if necessary.*
Inspect the brake linings.
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze if not
done at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).
Drain the transfer case and refill.

108,000
(180 000)
[108]
X
X
X

114,000
(190 000)
[114]
X
X
X

120,000
(200 000)
[120]
X
X
X
X

126,000
(210 000)
[126]
X
X
X

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

X
X
X
X
X
X

431 M

M 432 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Rotate the tires.
E Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the PCV Valve, replace if necessary.〫
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the engine accessory drive belt, replace if necessary.*
Inspect the brake linings.
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze if not
done at 120,000 miles (200 000 km).
Drain the transfer case and refill.

132,000
(220 000)
[132]
X
X
X

138,000
(230 000)
[138]
X
X
X

144,000
(240 000)
[144]
X
X
X

150,000
(250 000)
[150]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X

SCHEDULE “A”

WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

433 M

A
I
N
T
E
N
First is Schedule ⴖBⴖ. It is for vehicles that are operated A
under the conditions that are listed below and at the N
C
beginning of the schedule.
E

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES — DIESEL ENGINES
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.

• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).

S
C
H
Extensive engine idling.
E
D
Driving in dusty conditions.
U
L
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).
E
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high S

• Stop and go driving.
•
•
•
•

speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
• Trailer towing.
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
• Off-road or desert driving.

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E

434

SCHEDULE “A”

NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule “B.”

the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.

Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Schedule “B.”

• Check the windshield washer solvent, add as required.

Use the schedule that best describes your driving condiS tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
C interval that occurs first.

• Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.

H
E
D
U
L
E
S

CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
At Each Stop for Fuel
• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while

Once a Month

• Inspect the battery, clean and tighten the terminals as
required.
• Check the fluid levels of engine coolant/anti-freeze
deaeration bottle, brake master cylinder, and transmission, and add as needed.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.

SCHEDULE “A”

At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
• Inspect brake hoses.
• Check the engine coolant/anti-freeze level, hoses, and
clamps.

435 M

• Inspect engine accessory drive belts. Replace as neces- I
N
sary.
T
E

• Inspect for the presence of water in the fuel filter/ N
A
water separator unit.
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

436

SCHEDULE “B” — DIESEL ENGINES

Schedule “B” — Diesel Engines
Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
• Stop and go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.

• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
• Trailer towing.
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
• Off-road or desert driving.

SCHEDULE “B” — DIESEL ENGINES

Miles
(Kilometers)
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Inspect the engine air filter element. Replace as
necessary.
Replace the engine air filter element.
Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit.
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain the transfer case and refill.
Drain and refill the front and rear axles.

6,250
(10 000)
X
X
X

12,500
(20 000)
X
X

18,750
(30 000)
X
X
X

25,000
(40 000)
X
X

X
X
X

31,250
(50 000)
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

437 M

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 438 SCHEDULE “B” — DIESEL ENGINES
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
A Rotate the tires.
N
C Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
E stowage.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Inspect the engine air filter element. Replace as
necessary.
Replace the engine air filter element.
Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit.
Replace the engine accessory drive belt.
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain and refill the front and rear axles.
Drain and refill the transmission fluid, and change
the filter.
Drain the transfer case and refill.

37,500
(60 000)
X
X

43,750
(70 000)
X
X
X

50,000
(80 000)
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

56,250
(90 000)
X
X
X

62,500
(100 000)
X
X

X
X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X

SCHEDULE “B” — DIESEL ENGINES

Miles
(Kilometers)
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
Inspect the engine air filter element. Replace as necessary.
Replace the engine air filter element.
Replace the engine accessory drive belt.
Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit.
Flush and replace the engine coolant/antifreeze.
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain the transfer case and refill.
Drain and refill the front and rear axles.

68,750
(110 000)
X
X
X

75,000
(120 000)
X
X

81,250
(130 000)
X
X
X

87,500
93,750
100,000
(140 000) (150 000) (160 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

8
X

439 M

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

440

SCHEDULE “B” — DIESEL ENGINES

〫 Applies only if vehicle is used for frequent trailer
towing, or fleet/commercial service.
† The replacement of such component is requested when
there is superficial wear, bearing clearance, or evident
grease leak.

Inspection and service should be performed anytime a
malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.

SCHEDULE “A”

441 M

Schedule “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate the tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
Inspect the engine air filter element. Replace as necessary.
Replace the engine air filter element.
Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit.
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain the transfer case and refill.

12,500
(20 000)
X
X
X
X

25,000
(40 000)
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

37,500
(60 000)
X
X
X
X

50,000
(80 000)
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M 442 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
A Rotate the tires.
N
C Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage.
E Inspect the engine air filter element. Replace as necesS
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

sary.
Replace the engine air filter element.
Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit.
Flush and replace the engine coolant/anti-freeze.
Replace the engine accessory drive belt.
Inspect the brake linings.
Drain the transfer case and refill.
Inspection and service should be performed anytime a
malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.

62,500
(100 000)
X
X
X
X

75,000
(120 000)
X
X
X

87,500
(140 000)
X
X
X
X

100,000
(160 000)
X
X
X

X
X

X
X
X

X
X

〫 The replacement of such component is requested
when there is superficial wear, bearing clearance, or
evident grease leak.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 447

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

䡵 Mopar威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

444

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Dealership name

445

• Vehicle identification number
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240

446

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service

contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufacturer’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

447

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.NHTSA.gov. or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of Transportation, Washington DC
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.

448

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
• Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computercontrolled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
• Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Call Toll Free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
• www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
• www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories established by the National highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.

449

All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions

450

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.

INDEX

452

INDEX

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 176,274
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 367
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,66,176
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,177
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,274
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,177
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 236
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254,386
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

INDEX

Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 156
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 23
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,274
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

453

Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 64
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401,402
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,147,309
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

454

INDEX

Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Caution, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199,213
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,66
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,60,62
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,60
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201,215,221
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Converter, Catalytic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . 377,407
Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . . . 369
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

INDEX

Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,234,240
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Diesel Engine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Diesel Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

455

Disposal
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Used Engine Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) . . . . . . 225
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 156
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 126
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 181

456

INDEX

Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,183
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 359,412
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354,355,356,357
Compartment Identification . . . . . . 354,355,356,357
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,309
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305,407

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,407
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,364,407
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364,365
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364,365
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 51
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,309,376
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

INDEX

Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175,403,404
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309,310
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Flipper Glass, Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

457

Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 408
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,182,404
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

458

INDEX

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305,306
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312,407
System Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308,314,315
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 313,315,358
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Speedometer . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . .
Glow Plug Light . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. . 175
. . 177
. . 255
23,305
. . 392
. . 182
. . 319
. . 318
. . 316

Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

INDEX

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 118
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 146
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Ignition
Cables (Spark Plug Wires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Wiring System (Spark Plug Wires) . . . . . . . . . . 367
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

459

Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173,175
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116,118
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339,342
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

460

INDEX

Key, Replacement . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
Key-In Reminder . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

17
15
15
19
14

Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,60
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Liftgate Flipper Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,113
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,176
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137,180
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113,118
Electronic Stability Program
(ESP) Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137,177,180
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 181
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,182,404
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Glow Plug Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

INDEX

Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114,116
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116,118
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Low Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 175
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119,145
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

461

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 175
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Tow/Haul Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137,177
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113,117,403,404
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

462

INDEX

Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

58,60
. 374
. 166
. 101

Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412,433
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Light Duty Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Light Duty Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427,441
Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415,436
Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 175,359
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,447
Multi-Displacement Engine System . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

INDEX

New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 305,306
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,181
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . 268,388
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . 268,388
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,364,407

463

Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364,365,407
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358,359
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179,338
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . 448
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Park Assist System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

464

INDEX

Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 283
Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 156
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101,102
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,372
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . 148,152,186

Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless
Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148,152
Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Radio, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199,213,232
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,226
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199,213
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Rear Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

INDEX

Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . 333
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 334
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 230
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

465

Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,226
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412,433
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 40
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,62
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

466

INDEX

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,393
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101,102
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,177
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,364
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201,215,221
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,175,403,404
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Spark Plug Wires (Ignition Cables/Wires) . . . . . . 367
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

INDEX

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,364
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,372
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . 230
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Storage, Behind the Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243,400
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

467

Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 43
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 236
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 179
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 283
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

468

INDEX

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,287,449
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283,284
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,278
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Tow/Haul Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318,350
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Traction Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

INDEX

Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254,386
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . 23
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 146
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 19
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,175,403,404
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396,399

469

Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284,316
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243,400
Video Entertainment System (Rear Seat Video
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364,365
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

470

INDEX

Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,374
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32,155
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,234,240
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Wiring, Ignition (Spark Plug Wires) . . . . . . . . . . . 367

NOTES

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Count                      : 472
Page Mode                       : UseNone
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-14, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:1c37737c-6afb-42c8-9000-450411f5f95c
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 6.0.1 (Windows)
Keywords                        : 
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Modify Date                     : 2006:05:17 07:58:11-04:00
Create Date                     : 2006:05:11 22:48:38Z
Metadata Date                   : 2006:05:17 07:58:11-04:00
Document ID                     : uuid:af2c0de7-5905-4e0b-a069-3d914da9cdb6
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 
Creator                         : 
Description                     : 
Author                          : 
Subject                         :

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Jeep 2007 Grand Cherokee Owners Manual

Jeep-2007-Grand-Cherokee-Owners-Manual-762674 jeep-2007-grand-cherokee-owners-manual-762674

2007 Jeep Grand Cherokee 2007_WK_Jeep_Grand_Cherokee Troubleshoot 2007 Jeep Grand Cherokee |

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation